Home

ABB - ACS 355

1. ae m i i FN co CS i E e xx E co 24V AC DC A c c l C 3 SS CR t SCR o000000600Q L Generic extension module specifications Enclosure degree of protection IP20 All materials are UL CSA approved When used with ACS355 drives the extension modules comply with EMC standard EN IEC 61800 3 2004 for electromagnetic compatibility and EN IEC 61800 5 1 2005 for electrical safety requirements MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module See MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module user s manual 3AFE68591091 English delivered with this option MREL 01 output relay module See MHEL 01 relay output extension module user s manual 3A4UA0000035957 English delivered with this option Appendix Extension modules 397 MPOW 01 auxiliary power module E Description The MPOW 01 auxiliary power module is used in installations where the drive s control part is required to be powered during network failures and maintenance interruptions The MPOW 01 provides auxiliary voltages to the control panel fieldbus and I O Note If you change any of the drive parameters when the drive is powered through the MPOW 01 you have to force parameter saving with parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE by setting the value to 1 SAVE otherwise all changed data will be lost E Elec
2. You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring For more information on the assistants see section Assistants mode on page 98 E Example Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8 00 to 15 30 8 a m to 3 30 p m and on Sundays from 12 00 to 15 00 12 to 3 p m By pressing the extension time switch the air conditioning is on for an extra hour DI5 cannot be the same as parameter 3601 value Program features 165 B Settings Parameter 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1007 1002 7102 1201 1208 1401 1402 1403 1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1505 2027 4226 5402 8425 8435 8495 Sequence programming state change trigger with timed 8426 8436 8496 function Timer Drive start and stop can be controlled with timer functions B Settings Parameter Additional information 1001 1002 Start stop signal sources Group 19 TIMER amp COUNTER Timer for start and stop E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0165 Start stop control time count Counter Drive start and stop can be controlled with counter functions The counter function can also be used as state change trigger signal in Sequence programming See section Sequence programming on page 166 B Settings Parameter Additional information 1001 1002 Start Stop signal sources Group 19 TIMER amp COUNTEH Timer for start and stop 8425 8426 8435 8436
3. 00 eee eee eens 86 Assistant control panel sccaciacodicSeeteera ita weneedeay ua WA ba Oe ROSES aN ay we 87 PRAISES ona eee eee ake ee eee dta tutis os 87 eau nadie eta cake ees ee 88 4r T 89 Oui OB uocat bs hie Ske a bp desee ia Viri 93 Parameters Mode stas UU 95 Assistants mode cuis doni tia RARA 98 Changed parameters mode isses sexes eR EE ERxaCEE GR dde 100 Fault logger Mode iiis xui ok Fodera OR De aia 101 Time and date mode Ls isses dun eur ST Ee pue RE HEROUM T EXER EE 102 Parameter backup modb crees RR m m R9 aee E RO OER EE OED ES 104 VO settings Mode esisriotir ERE ER ER dU ERES HY ad iade ed edd 107 10 Application macros What this chapter contains essa dk orem aea a etc obe e roa eae ici AS 109 Overview OB CIOS tao daa ue der MEE ate eee e e eco dec 109 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros ooooocconoococoo 111 ABB standard macto 22 RR nid re be Ia Rig Ex DEGG PEUX 112 Default l O connectioris o eec RR ee 112 3 WILe Matro iuste E Ehe EUER beoe pu a edd u d 113 Default I O connections sseee RR RRRIRRRIRRRRRRRR nan 113 Alternate MAC Ons erede esu etim Mee pM E Era Mc E E 114 Default I O connections sseee RR RRRRRRRRRIRRRRR RR RR nan 114 Motor potentiometer macro sou medo ce Le b ERE OR eR RE deg E ace dd d Eb dba bado 115 Default I O connections RR enna 115 8 Table of contents Hand AUto Iact oae duke a ia a 1
4. DIG INV See selection DNV 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 See A 1 section Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 on page 127 KEYPAD Control panel 1 Analog input Al1 1 2 Analog input Al2 2 2 Q Z lt gt Actual signals and parameters 189 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Al JOYST Analog input Al1 as joystick The minimum input signal runs 3 the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction Minimum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1 MAX Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to HEQUEST Speed ref Par 1301 20 par 1302 100 1104 Al 1104 Hysteresis 4 2V 4mA 6 10V 20mA ona WARNING If parameter 7307 MINIMUM Al1 is set to 0 V and analog input signal is lost ie O V the rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog input signal is lost Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 to 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to FAULT 4 Al2 JOYST See selection A 1 JOYST DI3U 4D R Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the refere
5. mi E no INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL 19 SETPNT DI4U 5D NC See selection D 3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input SEQ PROG Sequence programming output See parameter group 84 33 OUT SEQUENCE PROG 4011 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as process PID controller 0 SETPNT reference when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4012 SETPOINT Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference 0 096 500 0 500 0 Value in percent Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the PID reference source value of parameter 4010 is Alf The reference minimum and maximum correspond to the 7301 MINIMUM Alt and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows Ref Ref MAX MIN MIN MAX 1301 1302 Alt 1301 1302 Al 4013 SETPOINT Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference signal source See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 266 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value 4014 FBK SEL ACT1 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 ACT2 MIN ACT1 2 MAX ACT1 2 sqrt ACT 1 2 sqA1 sqA2 sqrt ACT1 COMM FBK 1 COMM FBK 2 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Description Selects the process actual value feedback signal for the process PID controller The sources for the variables ACT 1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4016 ACT1 INPUT a
6. 8495 Counter signal as state change trigger in Sequence 8496 programming 166 Program features E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0166 Start stop control pulse count Sequence programming The drive can be programmed to perform a sequence where the drive shifts typically through 1 8 states User defines the operation rules for the whole sequence and for each state The rules of a particular state are effective when the Sequence program is active and the program has entered the state The rules to be defined for each state are Run stop and direction commands for the drive forward reverse stop Acceleration and deceleration ramp time for the drive Source for the drive reference value State duration e RO DO AO status Signal source for triggering the shift to the next state e Signal source for triggering the shift to any state 1 8 Every state can also activate drive outputs to give an indication to external devices Sequence programming allows state transitions either to the next state or to a selected state State change can be activated with eg timed functions digital inputs and supervision functions Sequence programming can be applied in simple mixer applications as well as in more complicated traverse applications The programming can be done with control panel or with a PC tool The drive is supported by version 2 91 or later of the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool which includes
7. 91 O5 1 21 234 IN rail E 1 Extension modules add 26 mm 1 02 in to the depth measure Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000067836 A Dimension drawings 387 Frame size R4 IP20 NEMA 1 ge I fi I Int EE N oo 00 00 d RO wA la S wug uiBue mesos xew 9 e 9 gt e S e n o o f i e F 9 Q no ds IM co Lt L VAAN 0Zdl by ezis aulely V E88Z900000VNVE ejnseeui yidap au oi ui ZO ww 9z ppe sejnpouJ uoIsua x3 g o 388 Dimension drawings Appendix Res
8. All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2 0 ON LOAD The drive is started with 4 kHz switching frequency to gain maximum output during the start After start up the switching frequency is controlled towards the selected value parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL if the output current or the temperature allows This selection provides adaptive switching frequency control Adaptation decreases the output performance in some cases fsw limit Drive current lon Drive temperature T 80 100 C 100 120 C 50 100 Temperature depends on the drive output frequency Short term overloading is allowed with each switching frequency depending on actual loading 2608 SLIP COMP Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation RATIO control 100 means full slip compensation 0 means no slip compensation Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation Can be used only in scalar control ie when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Example 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite the full slip compensation SL P COMP RATIO 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz The static speed error is 35 Hz 34 Hz 1 Hz To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased 2609 NOISE Enables the noise smoothing function Noise smoothing DISABLE SMOOTHING gistributes the
9. B Settings Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION 138 Program features Flux braking The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor By increasing the motor flux the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy Motor speed 130 N Tg Braking torque TN 100 N m No Flux braking 60 d Flux braking 40 Flux UE 20 No Flux braking f Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Braki 26 raking torque Flux braking oo power 100 D 7 5 kW 2 2 kW 8 0 37 kW 60 40 20 P f Hz Braking torque No Flux braking 100 80 60 40 20 Program features 139 The drive monitors the motor status continuously also during the Flux braking Therefore Flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed The other benefits of Flux braking are The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking The cooling of the motor is efficient The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux braking not the rotor current The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor B Settings Parameter 2602 FLUX BRAKING Flux optimization Flux optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive op
10. PID output D part of controller output 0 0 10 0s Derivation time If parameter value is set to zero the 1 0 1s derivative part of the PID controller is disabled 4004 PID DERIV Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the FILTER process PID controller Increasing the filter time smooths the derivative and reduces noise derivative filter is disabled 4005 ERROR Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and NO uM C en O Normal A decrease in feedback signal increases drive PS speed Error Reference Feedback Inverted A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Feedback Reference 0 68 See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections in the given range 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for PID controller actual values 264 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 4 Example PI 3 141593 0 93 3 1 993 31 2 Wsi4 314 ER 03142 3 142 31416 3 1416 4008 0 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100 VALUE the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values Units 4006 Scale 4007 1000 2 Internal scale 96 X XE Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0 VALUE the 100 0 scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values X X Unit and range de
11. dnog jewur 1J81 Joueg peeds 1uejsuoo 12eJos Jal LLX3 rs way 05 E p peeds IN3uH 201 201 2J91 oueg L19J GUed sd 901 a 1e 0r sapu seed S Lely bby N o Y _ o INO LGld en eA tald uonoejes JIM YOUMS ye id 152 Program features B Settings Hur He pg 1107 REF2 minimum limit 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 E Diagnostics 072810128 073010781 0132 0133 PID 1 2 deviation 0170 AO value defined by Sequence programming Program features 153 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active Output frequency Motor speed refActive PIDCtrlActive 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE modulating 1 1 Activate sleeping 0 Deactivate sleeping Motor speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The reference EXT REF2 is in use See parameter 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL PIDCtrlActive Parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO PID CONTROL modulating Drive IGBT control is operating 154 Program features E Example The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function Motor speed ty Sleep delay 4024 Control panel display
12. 21 Appendix Safe torque off STO What this appendix contains es m o Rx cR y Rm ERR XA Ede wee 399 Basics eee ee ee ee E ee ee ee rs ee ee ee A E 399 Program features settings and diagnostics leslie 400 Operation of the STO function and its diagnostics function o oo ocooooo 400 STO stat s MCICANONS ptas is WR EE bd 401 STO function activation and indication delays 0c cece eee 402 Installation cL 402 Start up and COMMISSION a ai 403 Technical data ud io Ed 403 SIOCOMPONSNIS sarene visos podi bis oe ax ee 403 Table of contents 15 Data related to Safety standards iau d ke Ed cp X PRSE a ete dd ves 404 issu T rMTTTDT 404 MAINIGNANCE PE ETT 404 Further information Product and service inquiries sss sue RR ER ERERX UD ER RR OR RO CE EROR eR RR RC 405 isola ci PF P TTUTTTUPET 405 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 00000 c eee ete eee 405 Document library on the Internet 2 0 00 cee eee 405 Mi 16 Table of contents Safety 17 Safety What this chapter contains The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the drive N Use of warnings Warnings caution you about co
13. 3206 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV2 OVER UNDER SUPRV3 Status according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV3 OVER 13 UNDER AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency FLT ALARM Fault or alarm EXT CTRL Drive is under external control REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost OVERCURRE Alarm Fault by overcurrent protection function NT FAULT RST Fault Automatic reset after the autoreset delay See parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 200 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq OVERVOLTAG Alarm Fault by overvoltage protection function E DRIVE TEMP Alarm Fault by drive overtemperature protection function UNDERVOLTA Alarm Fault by undervoltage protection function GE Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal is lost Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal is lost MOTOR TEMP Alarm Fault by motor overtemperature protection function See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT STALL Alarm Fault by stall protection function See parameter 3010 28 STALL FUNCTION UNDERLOAD Alarm Fault by underload protection function See parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC PID SLEEP ID sleep function See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30 SE
14. EMC filter disconnected plastic EMC filter screw installed US parametrization 2 Braking time maximum allowed braking time in seconds at PBRmax every 120 seconds at 40 C ambient temperature Symbols Rmin Minimum allowed brake resistor that can be connected to the brake chopper Rmax maximum allowed brake resistor that allows Pgrmax PBRmax maximum braking capacity of the drive must exceed the desired braking power Ratings by resistor type CBR V CBR V CBR V CBR V CBR V_ CBT H 160 210 260 460 660 560 WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum L value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance B Selecting the brake resistor cables Use a shielded cable with the conductor size specified in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 361 The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 5 m 16 ft 392 Appendix Resistor braking W Placing the brake resistor Install all resistors in a place where they will cool in WARNING The materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable The surface temperature of the resistor is high Air flowing from the resistor is of hundreds of degrees Celsius Protect the resistor against contact E Protecting the system in brake circuit fault situations Protecting the system in cable and brake resistor short circuit situations For short circuit pr
15. LOC REM Selection between local and external remote control Parameter Oo SOS 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 Reference source for EXT1 EXT2 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference Program features 127 E Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXT f Select DI DI Select DIS EXT1 in cabe Irection Fieldbus selection See chapters COMM Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter on page 301 and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 Control panel KEYPAD Timed function TIMED FUNC 1 4 Timer Counter START STOP Sequence SEQ PROG programming W Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXTT1 Alt All Al2 DIS DI4 DI5 Al2 EXTI DI3 Fieldbus selection BEET Ce me See chapters Hz rpm DI5 Fieldbus control with Embedded fieldbus embedded fieldbus on page 301 and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 Fieldbus adapter FREQ INPUT KEYPAD SEQ PROG Frequency input Control panel Sequence programming 128 Program features
16. P BRUTA empate E 0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1 P Fae enpago samranga E 0414 DI 1 5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1 5 at the time the latest fault I occurred binary Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off Actual signals and parameters 185 Parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1001 EXT1 Defines the connections and the source for the start stop D 1 2 COMMANDS land direction commands for external control location 1 EXT1 Note Start signal must be reset if the drive has been stopped through STO Safe torque off input see parameter 3025 STO OPERATION or emergency stop selection see parameter 2709 EMERG STOP SEL NOT SEL No start stop and direction command source DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 7003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI1 2 Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI2 0 forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P Pulse start through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start In order to 3 start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQ
17. RO is energized 0 RO is de energized 0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output when transistor output is used as 1 1 a digital output 0164 TO Transistor output frequency when transistor output is used 1 1 Hz FREQUENCY las a frequency output 0165 TIMER VALUE Timer value of timed start stop See parameter group 19 1 0 01s TIMER amp COUNTER 0166 COUNTER Pulse counter value of counter start stop See parameter 1m VALUE group 19 TIMER amp COUNTER 1 1 0167 SEQ PROG Status word of the Sequence programming STS Bit 0 ENABLED 1 enabled Bit 1 STARTED Bit 2 PAUSED Bit 3 LOGIC VALUE logic operation defined by parameters 8406 8410 0168 SEQ PROG Active state of the Sequence programming 1 8 state 1 1 STATE 1 8 0169 SEQ PROG Current state time counter of the Sequence programming TIMER 0170 SEQ PROG AO Analog output control values defined by the Sequence 1 0 196 VAL programming See parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL 1 0171 SEQ CYCLE Executed sequence counter of the Sequence programming CNTR See parameters 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC and 8416 CYCLE CNT RST 0172 ABS TORQUE Calculated absolute value of the motor torque in percent of 1 0 196 the motor nominal torque Actual signals No Name Value 0173 RO 2 4 STATUS 0179 BRAKE TORQUE MEM 0180 ENC SYNCHRONIZ ED 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FBSTS WORD 2 0305 FAULT WORD 1 Actual sign
18. Sleep level ss PID SLEEP Actual value Wake up delay 4026 Wake up deviation 4025 t Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed B Settings Additional information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 4122 4126 Sleep function settings E Diagnostics Additional information 1401 PID sleep function status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 PID sleep function status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only Additional information PID SLEEP Sleep mode Program features 155 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sen
19. gt Booster time 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timed NOT SEL P SR NY ron can coneis oto ime porode ano o NOTSEL No time periods selected iO rata Wmepebds2anis B i e o e S Actual signals and parameters 261 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TTA Tata fimo periods 2and4 fo TieteeT Time periods 1 2a i Tta Tmepeiodsiania i2 TISTST4 Wmepeidei Sani fe TATdT4 Tmepeiods2 3and O i4 TieT2 T3 14 Wmepeiodei2 3and i5 BOOSTER Booster i6 Tis Booseranimepeidi V TaB peseram mepeios2 fr TT TaB BES aTa Boose and tne prods ands a TieT2 T3 8 Booster and time periods 1 2and3 Jas TaB Boosterandime pe od 2 TisTaB Booster and time periods tanda PS T1423 44B Booster and ime periods 1 2 3anrd4 a 3627 e FUNC 2 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNG 1 SRC ME RE See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC uA SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC fF 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC MA SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller High gain 1 0 may cause speed oscillation 1 100 Gain When value is set to 0 1 the PID controller output 0 changes one tenth as much as the error value When value is setto 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred
20. kh TE esas bi jpomdspeigt i0 m mWampee f mV mit f kw kilowatt 13 Watt O E DA CI E C me O Y V Hz Zo h rem kh C mA mV kW W kWh oF hp Actual signals and parameters 253 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq MWh megawatthour O y yY OS mis meters per second mah cubicmetemsperhour 20 amas cubiedecimetersperseconi bar ba E KPa Kiopascal 8 GPM Walonpermiue 3 4 PS 5 CFM cubic feet per minute wooo milions of gallons per day 28 inHg inches of mercury 9 FPM feet per minute kols Wibyespersecond Sf Wo e ohm 33 pulses per minute fa pulsas per second Werspersecond 86 Wespermmte 87 Wersperhour S8 Ss kubicmetespersecond a maim cubic meters per minute fo kgs Klogamspersecnd A kgim Wlogamspermmue fe kgih Kiograms per hour mbar milibar A 45 GPS galions per second gal gallons per second galm galonspermne e gal galosperur 3 f9 EE cubieieetpersecond To fm cub feet per minute St fg cubic feet per hour bs poundspersecon 53 iim pounds per minute fa Ib poudsperhor s FPS feetpersecond 3 B6 57 254 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 59 esi poun s per squaredinch e 62 a O CA min meters per minute as Kath owandcubicmsesperhor 88 3406 OUTPUT MIN Sets the minimum display
21. want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the displa shows a message about the completion Press s to return to the Par backup menu To perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par backup menu with keys A and amp wv 2 and press The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press EP if you want to stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press s to return to the Par backup menu Copying parameters eae 50 tetris re n a ABORT 1 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter upload successful LOC UPAR BACKUP Downl oadi ng parameters set ful 50 cobra ca cbc ABORT 100 00 UMESSAGE eter download 106 Control panels How to view information about the backup Sem aay Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC OMAIN ME NU Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly y until Y you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys as and SY 7 and pressing Select BACKUP INFO on the Par backup menu with keys C A and SY Z and press s The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made DRIVE TYPE type of the drive DRIVE RATING rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where XXX Nominal current rating If pre
22. Drive control parameters After the Modbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV 1001 EXT1 Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits COMMANDS 0 1 STOP START when EXT1 is selected as the active control location 1002 EXT2 Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits COMMANDS 0 1 STOP START when EXT2 is selected as the active control location 1003 DIRECTION FORWARD Enables the rotation direction control REVERSE as defined by parameters 1001 and REQUEST 1002 The direction control is explained in section Reference handling on page 311 1010 JOGGING Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation SEL through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits 20 21 JOGGING 1 JOGGING 2 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1103 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 40002 for REF 1 SELECT COMM A 1 when EXT1 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Fieldbus references on page 308 for information on the alternative settings 1106 REF2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used 40003 for REF2 SELECT COMM A 1 when EXT
23. If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM Display value 3407 Source 3402 3403 value Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting BE 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM See the figure for parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting OM 252 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Signed Unsigned value Unit is selected by parameter 3405 O0 2 3404 value Display 32768 32767 BAR METER Bar graph DIRECT Direct value Decimal point location and units of measure are the same as for the source signal Note Parameters 3402 3403 and 3405 3407 are not effective 3405 OUTPUT Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Note Unit selection does not convert values pot M qe s eod n nou mm eviwonspermmue O
24. Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case of a communication break LAST SPEED Protection is active The drive generates alarm O COMM 2005 and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case of a communication break k 3019 COMM FAULT Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3 0 s TIM supervision See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 0 600 0 s Delay time 1 0 1s 3021 Ali FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al1 If parameter 3001 0 0 LIMIT Al lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al1 LOSS 0007 when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1301 MINIMUM Alf 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 2 0 196 3022 AI2 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al2 If parameter 3001 0 0 LIMIT AI MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault AI2 LOSS 0008 when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 o 246 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorr
25. Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40005 0 65538 5311 EFB PAR 11 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40006 065535 5312 EFB PAR 12 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40007 ABB DRV LIM ABB drives limited profile 5313 EFB PAR 13 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40009 065535 5315 EFB PAR 15 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40010 065535 5316 EFB PAR 16 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40012 cafe yu A 5s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 280 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq begins transmitting response to the master request ABB drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL 0000 hex Control word Read only copy of the fieldbus Control word hex Status word Read only copy of the fieldbus Status word hex 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 Selects data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus controller pO IT 1 6 Control and status data words 5401 setting i01 9999 5402 FBA DATA IN 2 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 5410 FBA DATA IN See
26. Parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive IR compensation is active only when the motor control mode is scalar see section Scalar contro on page 144 When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require high break away torque In vector control no IR compensation is possible needed Motor voltage IR compensation No compensation f Hz B Settings Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Programmable protection functions B Al lt Min Al Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit Settings Parameters 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT Program features 145 B Panel loss Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as the control location for the drive stops communicating Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR B External fault External faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 B Stall protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condit
27. Reference handling is the same for the ABB drives profile embedded fieldbus and DCU profile See section Reference handling on page 311 B Actual value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the selected function See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 175 Fault tracing 335 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 77 before you work on the drive Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs on page 356 An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact an ABB representative The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus communication See chapters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 301 and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 How to reset The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key gt basic control panel or RESET Ey assistant control panel through digital input or fieldbus or by switching the supply voltag
28. Speed up speed 1 Torque 112 Application macros ABB standard macro This is the default macro It provides a general purpose I O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Parameters on page 185 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 51 E Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal sable sted soe Ala jan pu Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 mm 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20 mA AA oii TIU TEL MEN LE pe Rian valage put 24 V DC max 290 A 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common n pcom Digital input common uan Stop 0 Start 1 X1B 38 RONC NM EEN Digital output max 100 mA cT DooUT p No fault Fault 1 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 DOGND 1 AM is used as a speed reference if vector 3 0 ramp times according to parameters mode is selected 2202 and 2203 2 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 1 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2205 and 2206 O 0 Set speed through Al1 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in j1 O Speed 1 1202 Safe torque off connections X1C STO not 0 i Speed 2 1203 shown in the diagram are jumpered by default Speed 3 1204 Application macros 113 3 wire macro This macro is used when the drive
29. if STO has been used while drive has been running 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions eg parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Fault tracing 341 Alarms generated by the basic control panel The basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code A5xxx ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5001 Drive is not responding Check panel connection 5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative communication profile 5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload backup file Retry parameter download 5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to local control mode another source 5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction See parameter locked 1003 DIRECTION 5013 Panel control is disabled Start from panel is not possible Reset because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove 3 wire active stop command before starting from panel See section 3 wire macro on page 113 and parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry because of drive fault 5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate local control mode lock and retry because local control See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK mode lock is active 5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative not found
30. k N 2m 0 N o O10 o 0 1 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 DI2 3 See selection D 7 2 DI3 4 See selection D 7 2 DI4 5 See selection DI1 2 DI1 2 3 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 DI2 and 12 DI3 1 DI active 0 DI inactive DI DI2 DIS Operation 0 0 0 Noconsantspeed 1 0 0 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 TH to seed dened by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 1 Speed defined by par 1205 CONST SPEED 4 1 0 1 Speed defined by par 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 1 1 Speed defined by par 1207 CONST SPEED 6 DI3 4 5 See selection D 1 2 3 TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used depending on the selection of parameter 7209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of timed function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED External speed reference or speed defined by parameter FUN182 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1205 CONST SPEED 4is used depending on the selection of parameter 7209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of timed functions 1 and 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS DI1 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI
31. two or three constant speeds are used Start stop is controlled with one digital input level start and stop It is possible to switch between two acceleration and deceleration times 3 wire Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used The drive is started and stopped with push buttons Alternate Speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs combination of the input states determines the operation Motor Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used The potentiometer speed is controlled by two digital inputs increase decrease keep unchanged 110 Application macros Macro e Suitable applications Hand Auto PID control Torque control Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is needed Some control signal terminals are reserved for one device the rest for the other One digital input selects between the terminals devices in use Process control applications for example different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control It is possible to switch between process and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for process control others for speed control One digital input selects between process and speed control Torque control applications It is possible to
32. voltage and power Motor speed and torque Intermediate circuit DC voltage Active control location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 Reference values Drive temperature Operating time counter h kWh counter e Digital I O and analog I O status PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display one signal on the basic control panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs B Settings Additional information 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the control panel Program features 135 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Groups 07 OPERATING DATA Lists of actual signals 04 FAULT HISTORY Motor identification The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start up A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start command is given During this first start up the motor is magnetized at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created This identification method is suitable for most applications In demanding applications a separate Identification run ID run can be perform
33. 00 MERU just one or two signals are selected for display the number and name of each displayed signal are shown in addition to the value or bar graph See page 96 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Sejm ON If you are not in the Output mode press Ey repeatedly until you get there If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing i The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode To change the direction from forward shown on pa status line to reverse 3 shown on the status line o vice versa press zz 0 Note Parameter 7003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 00 00 MEN REQUEST 94 Control panels How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Sem aay If you are not in the Output mode press ES repeatedly until you get there If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing i The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press 4 The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive permanent memory and resto
34. 1 value 1 parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 value DIA i DI5 2 DM See selection DI D5 See selection DIT Actual signals and parameters 217 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1 2 selection ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 320 Maximum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and maximum torque limit 2 is defined by parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile EXT2 Value of signal 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 DI INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 value O parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 value y DISINV 2015 MIN TORQUE Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive See parameter 300 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 600 0 0 0 Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 DEM k Q Ie Z E a E Z lt 2 4 2016 MIN TORQUE Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive See parameter 300 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 600 0 0 0 Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2017 MAX TORQUE Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive See 300 parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 0 0 600 0 Value in percent of
35. 2 seu oh eERR PERO eke chee he eG triada ENS I RE 32 UNPACKING 2d d eR HERR ORE er Sac ee ae edd ee Rr redo dr d glo e aad 33 GheckingthedeliVery iiouxonpefieeee uUa DRE SLSR SRSA RAO Ea ed dau bet and 33 oe ceras patetico perras 34 Install the drive cesan e RR ERU de prd AAA eae ERR dE d 34 Fasten clamping plates a3 un dois ed dee tdi 35 Attach the optional fieldbus module 0 00 eee ee eee eens 35 6 Table of contents 5 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains 23a xx teg RR oor REESE ae SUR oe Rd Implementing the AC power line connection 00 0c ee Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means European union cnt teense a Soda A A a e id Other regions 2a adora cota pad EUR ge RO aded de Ro acie eco uto e eta t d Reo t d Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive cee eee Selecting the power cables 0 0000 cette nee General TUES usais le aid ad dol a ie pi io Alternative power Cable types oooooccccoccnno eee Motor cable shield ii a a E Ra oa E OR Additional US requirements 1 2 x x oe pa ose Le eR ce de Ro eee oe o e Selecta the c ntrol Cables ue pops Rex cER e BL Pe bxe Ed ged ee doee oy General rules spread sea Relay cable 1 ciues Oye sar ore Control panel Cable soccer pice A IA eck ake E Ro ting Te cables errada als apa a Control cable QUES susp acea mcis ros UR res i ad UR Se E odi Prot
36. 2 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 0 Drive runs atthe jogging speed PEER 3 4 e decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function O 0 jDriveisstopped R gt Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed 7 8 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed MBE ro seien Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed Bed Da A oi LN DAMM 9 10 O 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp decelerates to zero Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp om 0 0 Drive is stopped 11 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp 12 13 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed reference 13 14 Drive decelerates to the Jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 14 15 1 O Drive runs at the jogging speed BESH 16 aot decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function X state can be either 1 or 0 Note The jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on 162 Program features Note The jogging speed over
37. 2013 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 37 1 0308 bit 12 AUTOMATIC RESET settings 2018 PID SLEEP Sleep function has See parameter groups 40 PROCESS 1 0309 bit 1 entered sleeping PIO SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET mode 2 2019 ID RUN Motor Identification run This alarm belongs to normal start up 0309 bit 2 is on procedure Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed Fault tracing 339 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2029 START ENABLE 1 MISSING 0309 bit 4 START ENABLE 2 MISSING 0309 bit 5 EMERGENCY STOP 0309 bit 6 ENCODER ERROR 0309 bit 7 programmable fault function 5003 FIRST START 0309 bit 8 INPUT PHASE LOSS 0309 bit 9 programmable fault function 3016 MOTOR BACK EMF 0309 bit 12 No Start enable 1 signal received No Start enable 2 signal received Drive has received emergency stop command and ramps to stop according to ramp time defined by parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module or between module and drive Motor identification magnetization is on This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Alarm is generated when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Permanent magnet motor is
38. 2205 2207 E Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 defined by parameters 2202 2204 M1 RAMP_OUT_O ui 0 Moorin Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 321 DCU profile Control word parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Name Value RAMP_HOLD Halt ramping Ramp function generator output held ll No operation RAMP IN 0 1 Force ramp input to zero pud No operation 14 REQ LOCALLOC Enable local lock Entering the local control mode is 15 16 17 19 21 20 2 27 disabled LOC REM key of the panel No operation TORQLIM2 1 Use minimum maximum torque limit 2 defined by parameters 2076 and 2078 Use minimum maximum torque limit 1 defined by parameters 2075 and 2017 DCU profile Control word parameter 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Name Value information CS FBLOCAL CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control word requested Example If the drive is in remote control and the start stop direction command source is DI for external control location 1 EXT1 by setting bit 16 to value 1 the start stop direction is controlled by the fieldbus command word No fieldbus local mode FBLOCAL REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control word for reference requested See the example for bit 16 FBLOCAL CTL No fieldbus local mode START DISABL 1 No Start enable Enable start Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM START DISABL 1 No Start enable Enable start Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COM
39. 5 and SY 2 and press wl Repeat for the second part After specifying the year press To cancel your changes press ee S CANCEL 100 00 OK To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press wie Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed Scroll the help text with keys A and Cv To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press EX T 100 00 To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press Sul To return to the previous display without making changes press EP 104 Control panels E Parameter backup mode The Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to three user sets to the assistant control panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive Uploading and downloading can be performed in local control The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter backu
40. 5019 Writing non zero Only parameter reset is allowed parameter value is prohibited 5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group is hidden 5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read only and cannot be protected changed 5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value allowed when drive is running 5024 Drive is executing a task Wait until task is completed 5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload download is complete or downloaded 5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative minimum limit 5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative maximum limit 5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative 342 Fault tracing ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative 5031 Drive is not ready for Check input power supply operation eg due to low DC voltage 5032 Contact your local ABB representative 5040 Parameter download error Selected parameter set is not in current parameter backup file 5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative does not fit into memory Parameter download error Selected parameter set is not in current parameter backup file 5044 Parameter backup file Check that file is compatible wi
41. 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 10 5501 FBA DATA Selects data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to OUT 1 the drive 0 Notinuse ss l Actual signals and parameters 281 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Control and status data words 5501 setting Dataword Actual value 1 Actual value 2 101 9999 5502 FBA DATA See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 OUT 2 5510 FBA DATA See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 OUT 10 programming state 0168 SEQ PROG STATE is set to 1 and all timers and outputs RO TO AO are set to zero DISABLED Disabled EXT2 Enabled in external control location 2 EXT2 EXT1 Enabled in external control location 1 EXT1 Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 EXT1 and EXT2 Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 EXT1 and EXT2 and in local control LOCAL 8401 SEQ PROG Enables Sequence programming DISABLE ENABLE If Sequence programming enable signal is lost the D Sequence programming is stopped Sequence 282 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8402 SEQ PROG Selects the source for the Sequence programming NOT SEL START activation signal When Sequence programming is activated the programming starts from the previously used state If Sequence programming activation signal is lost the Sequence programming is stopped and all timers and outputs RO TO AO are set to zero Sequence programming state 0168 SEQ
42. Action A To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local control LOC shown on the left press 2 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE as appropriate before returning to the previous display The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 2 The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 87 If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings To stop the drive in local control press CQ Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly To start the drive in local control press lt lt gt gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapialy It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint Control panels 79 How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode e
43. Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 11 OPTIMI re ra We ves par 9071 SEG VAL T HC ve 290 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Al1LO1 ORDI5 State change when Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 12 Al2HI1 ORDI5 State change when Al2 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 13 value or when DI5 is active Al 1 LOW 2 State change when Al1 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value Al 1 HIGH 2 State change when Al1 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value Al 2 LOW 2 State change when Al2 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 16 Al 2 HIGH 2 State change when Al2 value gt par 8473 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 17 value Ali OR 2 LO2 State change when Al1 or Al2 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 18 LOW value AlLO2AI2HI2 State change when Al1 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 19 Al1LO2 ORDI5 State change when Al1 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 20 AI2HI2 ORDI5 State change when Al2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 21 value or when DI5 is active TIMED FUNC 1 Trigger with timed function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed DIZ OR DELAY DIS OR DELAY DI4 OR DELAY See selection D 1 OR DELAY DI5 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY AI1HI1 ORDLY State change when Al1 value gt par 8477
44. CWeioooc xc xt 1114 profile ie Bit6 1 State transition also occurs if the fault OPERATING SW Bit8 1 is reset from any other source eg digital input E 320 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU communication profile Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits two different signals are needed for both the control words 0301 and 0302 and status words 0303 and 0304 Control words The following tables describe the Control word content for the DCU profile DCU profile Control word parameter 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 Bi Name Value Information STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter 2102 or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 a Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command o No operation 3 1 START 1 Start a Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 No operation REVERSE Reverse direction The direction is defined by using the XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 sign of the reference values OO E CM I NN BE m o RESET 5 xr i 0 Switch to external contol EXT pe owt Rn nab MM NR ia R p along Geni active deceleration ramp bit 10 Bit O PS must tbe 1 STOP o No operation SSS in o 803 M Em a ilis i Oesttostp BO value mustbe STOP 0 No operation 10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 defined by parameters
45. During the change the drive will not start Note Always save the User parameter set with parameter 9902 after changing any parameter setting or reperforming the motor identification The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed Any unsaved changes will be lost Note The value of this parameter is not included in the User parameter sets A setting once made remains despite User parameter set change Note Selection of User parameter set 2 can be supervised through relay outputs RO 1 4 and digital output DO See parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO SIGNAL User parameter set change is not possible through a digital input Parameter sets can be changed only from the control panel DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 User parameter set control through digital input DI1 Falling edge of digital input DI1 User parameter set 1 is loaded into use Rising edge of digital input DI1 User parameter set 2 is Da See selection DIT IB See selection DIT See selection DIT See selection DIT DI1 2 User parameter set selection through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 Dl active O DI inactive Dili DI2 User parameter set 0 O0 User parameter set 1 1 O0 User parameter set 2 O 1 User parameter set 3 DI2 3 See selection D 7 2 DI3 4 See selection D 7 2 Dl4 5 See s
46. EMC filter screw installed US parametrization 2 Overloading not allowed through Common DC connection R N 1 R2 R2 R3 R4 R4 R1 aw ojo o 4 5 10 15 05 075 15 R Technical data 359 EB Definitions Input hy continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses hy 480 V continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses for drives with 480 V input voltage Output lon continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute every ten minutes l2 4 min 10 min Maximum 50 overload current allowed for one minute every ten minutes lomax maximum output current Available for two seconds at start otherwise as long as allowed by the drive temperature PN typical motor power The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4 pole motors This is also the maximum load through the Common DC connection and must not be exceeded RO R4 ACS355 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 E Sizing Drive sizing is based on the rated motor current and power To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also the rated power of the drive must be higher than or equal to compared to the rated motor pow
47. FREQ 1 rpm 1207 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 6 E 40 0 Hz SPEED 6 U 48 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rom MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Constant 1 rpm speed 6 is used also as jogging speed See section Control of a mechanical brake on page 157 1208 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 7 E 50 0 Hz SPEED 7 Constant speed 7 is used also as jogging speed see U 60 0 Hz section Control of a mechanical brake on page 157 or with fault functions 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rom Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 0 30000 rom MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Constant speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See section Control of a mechanical brake on page 157 196 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1209 TIMED MODE Selects timed function activated speed Timed function can CS1 2 3 4 S EXT CS1 2 3 be used to change between the external reference and constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 or TIMED FUN182 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 this timed function selects an external speed reference or constant speed 1 timed function active O timed function inactive Timed function 14 hn E E
48. FbEq 2104 DC HOLD CTL Activates the DC hold or DC braking function NOT SEL NorseL jme O Actual signals and parameters 221 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DC HOLD DC hold function active DC hold is not possible if parameter 1 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ When both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter 2105 DC HOLD SPEED the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor The current is set by parameter 2106 DC CURR REF When the reference speed exceeds parameter 2105 value normal drive operation continues Motor speed DC hold A t Ref DC hold speed i Note DC hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off Note Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up In applications where long DC hold times are required externally ventilated motors should be used If the DC hold period is long the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor DC BRAKING DC current braking function active 2 If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to COAST DC braking is applied after the start command is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to RAMP DC braking is applied after the ramp SPEED CTL 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC hold current See parameter 2104 DC 30 HOLD CTL 0 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal cu
49. NOT SEL No trim function selected O 0 PROPORTION Active The trimming factor is proportional to the rom Hz AL reference before trimming REF1 DIRECT Active The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum limit used in the reference control loop maximum speed frequency or torque 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function See section 0 0 Reference trimming on page 129 100 0 100 0 Multiplier 1 0 1 4232 CORRECTION Selects the trim reference See section Reference trimming PID2REF SRC on page 129 PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4270 ie signal 0129 1 PID 2 SETPNT value PID2OUTPUT PID2 output ie signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2 274 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4233 TRIM Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the SPEED F SELECTION speed or torque reference See section Reference trimming on page 129 OQ SPEED FREQ Speed reference trimming TORQUE Torque reference trimming only for REF2 4301 BRAKE OPEN Defines the brake open delay the delay between the DLY internal open brake command and the release of the motor speed control The delay counter starts when the motor current torque speed has risen to the level required at brake release parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 FORCED OPEN LVL and the motor has been magnetized Simultaneously with the start of the counter the
50. PROG STATE remains unchanged If start from the first Sequence programming state is required the Sequence programming must be reset by parameter 8404 SEQ PROG RESET lf start from the first Sequence programming state is always required reset and start signal sources 8404 and 8402 SEQ PROG START must be through the same digital input Note The drive will not start if no Run enable signal is received 1601 RUN ENABLE Sequence programming activation through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive SeesdedionDHUMV o bis BeesdecionDUNV DiNV See selection DIV f DIN See selection DTW Sequence programming activation through digital input DI1 1 1 active 0 inactive See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10 n Selects the source for the Sequence programming pause NOT SEL signal When Sequence programming pause is activated all timers and outputs RO TO AO are frozen Sequence programming state transition is possible only by parameter 8405 SEQ ST FORCE Actual signals and parameters 283 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI INV Pause signal through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive See selection onay F osm See selection IWIN F Pause signal through digital input DI1 1 active 0 1 inactive 8404 SEQ PROG Selects the source for the Sequence programming reset NOT SEL RESET signal Sequence
51. Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation ae REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 AI2 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 DI4U 5D See selection D 3U 4D DI4U 5D NC See selection D 3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input SEQ PROG Sequence programming output See parameter 8420 ST1 33 ERE RR Al1 SEQ Addition of analog input Ali and Sequence programming 34 Al2 SEQ Addition of analog input Al2 and Sequence programming 35 1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 0 0 Hz Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source 1 rpm signal Actual signals and parameters 191 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbE
52. Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog input and control panel signals The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions addition subtraction multiplication and division The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions addition and multiplication The drive reference can be given with frequency input e n external control location EXT 1 2 the drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through Sequence programming by using a mathematical function addition It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits B Settings Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source type and scaling Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Speed reference acceleration deceleration ramps Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque reference ramp times Group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different sta
53. See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION SELECTION 4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL LEVEL 4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY DELAY 272 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4125 WAKE UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE UP DEV 4126 WAKE UP See parameter 4026 WAKE UP DELAY DELAY See parameter 4001 GAIN P 4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME ME AR no Q J30 gt z 4203 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME TIME 4204 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV See parameter 4006 UNITS 4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 4208 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4209 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4210 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL SEL 4211 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT 4212 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN IN 4213 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX A A N N e eo O al Cc m ze deo I MAX See parameter 4014 FBK SEL See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 4216 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT T See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMU
54. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 Logic value according to supervision parameters 7 OVER 3204 3206 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 Logic value according to supervision parameters OVER 3207 3209 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER UNDER SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV2 OVER UNDER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV3 OVER UNDER TIMED FUNC 1 Logic value 1 is activated by timed function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 timed function active TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 8407 SEQ LOGIC Selects the operation between logic value 1 and 2 Logic NOT SEL OPER 1 operation values are used in state transitions See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N selection LOGIC VAL 10 11 12 poc Actual signals and parameters 285 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq NOT SEL Logic value 1 no logic comparison ND Logic function AND 1 ogic function OR 2 OR Logic function XOR 8408 SEQ LOGIC See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 NOT SEL VAL 2 See parameter 8406 8409 SEQ LOGIC Selects the operation between logic value 3 and the result NOT SEL OPER 2 of the first logic operation defined by parameter 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 NOT SEL Logic value 2 no logic comparison N Logic function AND 1 X l D Logic function OR 2 OR Logic f
55. Setpoint signal reference for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0132 PID 1 Deviation of the process PID1 controller ie the difference DEVIATION between the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0133 PID 2 Deviation of the PID2 controller ie the difference between DEVIATION the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0134 COMM RO Relay output Control word through fieldbus decimal See 1 1 WORD parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0135 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1 0136 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 2 0137 PROCESS Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 1 DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS Process variable 2 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 2 DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS Process variable 3 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 3 DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter thousands of hours Runs when the drive is modulating Counter cannot be reset 0141 MWH MWH counter The counter value is accumulated
56. TORQUE OFF The alarm bit is updated Start command must be toggled to continue running the drive If the operation delay between the inputs is excessive or only one STO input is de energized an event is always considered a fault STO LOST or STO2 LOST This event cannot be changed De energizing of only one STO input is not considered normal operation since the safety integrity level would decrease if only one channel is used STO status indications When both STO inputs are energized the STO function is in the standby state and the drive operates normally If either of the STO inputs or both are de energized the STO function is executed in a safe manner and corresponding reaction is updated according to the table below STO event Fault name Description Status Fault 0044 SAFE TORQUE STO functions correctly and the 0307 FAULT WORD 3 OFF fault must be reset before starting bit 4 Fault 0045 STO1 LOST STO input channel 1 has not de 0307 FAULT WORD 3 energized but channel 2 has bit 5 Opening contacts on channel 1 might have been damaged or there is a short circuit Fault 0046 STO2 LOST STO input channel 2 has not de 0307 FAULT WORD 3 energized but channel 1 has bit 6 Opening contacts on channel 2 might have been damaged or there is a short circuit Alarm 2035 SAFE TORQUE STO functions correctly 0309 ALARM WORD 2 OFF bit 13 402 Appendix Safe torque off STO E STO function activation and indication dela
57. a chance of mismatch between these functions In some cases it is dscired to control several functions with one input For example in the ABB standard macro DI3 and DI4 are set to control constant speeds On the other hand it is possible to select value 6 D 3U 4D for parameter Actual signals and parameters 177 1103 REF1 SELECT That would mean a mismatched duplicate functionality for DI3 and DI4 either constant speed or acceleration and deceleration The function that is not required must be disabled In this case the constant speed selection must be disabled by setting parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL to NOT SEL or to values not related to DI3 and DI4 Remember to also check the default values of the selected macro when configuring the drive inputs 178 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals Actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq z Tm reverse direction 0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz Shown by default 1 0 1 Hz on the panel Output mode display pecus Measured motor current in A Shown by default on the 120 1A panel Output mode display torque 0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 120 1 kW 0107 DC BUS Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC 1 1V VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT Calculated motor voltage in V AC 1 1V VOLTAGE 0110 DRIVE TEM Measured IGBT temperature in C 1 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL External reference REF1 in rom or Hz Unit depends on 1 0 1 Hz REF 1 parameter 990
58. acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity A random component with an average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Note Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz DISABLE Disabled lO ENABLE Enabled 236 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2610 USER Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 19 of DEFINED U1 frequency defined by parameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1 See section Custom U f ratio on page 141 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2611 USER Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 10 0 Hz DEFINED F1 00 8000 Feen iz 2612 USER Defines the second voltage point of the custom U f curve at 38 of DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2613 USER DEFINED Uy F2 See section Custom U f ratio on page 141 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2613 USER Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 20 0 Hz DEFINED F2 0 0 600 0 Hz T 2614 USER Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 47 5 of DEFINED U3 frequency defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3 Uy See section Custom U f ratio on page 141 0 120 of Un V Voltage 1 1V c I Zz lt Oo E N I o k E lt IT N 2615 USER Defines the
59. and the EXT FBA fieldbus adapter module MODBUS RS232 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module 5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module specific For more information see the module manual Note that not all of these 5126 FB PAR 26 parameters are necessarily used 5127 FBA PAR 0 DONE Validates any changed REFRESH 1 REFRESH adapter module configuration parameter settings Note In adapter module the parameter group number is A group 1 for group 51 EXT COMM MODULE TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION FBA DATA IN 1 0 Defines the data transmitted FBA DATA OUT 1 6 from the drive to the fieldbus 10 101 9999 controller FBA DATA OUT 1 0 Defines the data transmitted OUT 1 6 from the fieldbus controller to Gee Or 9958 the drive Note In adapter module the parameter group number is C group 3 for group 54 FBA DATA IN and B group 2 for group 55 FBA DATA OUT After the module configuration parameters in groups 51 EXT COMM MODULE 54 FBA DATA IN and 55 FBA DATA OUT have been set the drive control parameters shown in section Drive control parameters on page 328 must be checked and adjusted when necessary 328 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH is activated Drive control parameters After the fieldbus communication has been set up the dr
60. be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop user s manual 3AFE68591074 English USER S1 User 1 macro loaded into use Before loading check that LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S1 Save User 1 macro Stores the current parameter settings 1 USER S2 User 2 macro loaded into use Before loading check that LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S2 Save User 2 macro Stores the current parameter settings 3 USER S3 User 3 macro loaded into use Before loading check that LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S3 Save User 3 macro Stores the current parameter settings 5 1 2 3 4 N m 296 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9903 MOTOR TYPE Selects the motor type AM Asynchronous motor Three phase AC voltage supplied 1 induction motor with squirrel cage rotor Permanent magnet motor Three phase AC voltage supplied synchronous motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal back emf voltage MODE VECTOR Vector control mode TORQ Reference 1 speed reference in rpm Reference 2 torque reference in percent 100 equals nominal torque SCALAR Scalar control mode FREQ Reference 1 frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 frequency reference in percent 100 is the absolute max
61. brake function energizes the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening 0 00 2 50 s Delay time 1 0 01s 4302 BRAKE OPEN Defines the motor starting torque current at brake release 100 V After start the drive current torque is frozen to the set value until the motor is magnetized 0 0 180 0 Value in percent of the nominal torque Ty in vector control or the nominal current oy in scalar control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 4303 BRAKE Defines the brake close speed After stop the brake is 4 096 CLOSE LVL closed when drive speed falls below the set value 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the nominal speed in vector control or the nominal frequency in scalar control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 4304 FORCED Defines the speed at brake release Parameter setting COs OPEN LVL overrides parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL setting After NOT SEL start the drive speed is frozen to the set value until the motor is magnetized The purpose of this parameter is to generate enough start torque to prevent the motor rotating into the wrong direction because of the motor load 0 0 NOT SEL Value in percent of the maximum frequency in scalar 0 0 100 0 control or the maximum speed in vector control If parameter value is set to zero the function is disabled The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 430
62. control panel 0 0000 ee eee eee 356 LEDS rM 356 17 Technical data What this chapter contains 23229 vede To dardo y bebita 357 arcu EELCEPEITTIPUTETTTUIEITTUTUTUETD 358 DEMONS xs esae Sora op pP E eant Rada A FUE E ER EMI 359 SIZING dicic iicet doa oat eb qb Roca oU dedo RO ace eds d aec i eo ade e wakes ios 359 3 A ee sese ee re ee ee ee eee d RU ees d ds 359 Power cable sizes and fuses 00 eee eee 361 Dimensions weights and free space requirements liliis 363 Dimensions and weights 24418 Seiuta duration genduce testa eiu xR bue np ES 363 Free space requirements 0 00 cee ee nn 363 Losses cooling data and noise ix es sa ce i aeo deo Ge RR RU Re T a ed ON HONE eee 364 Losses and cooling data opened dope me px RECIPES peg weed vates 364 NOISE as as a as 365 Terminal and lead through data for the power cables 0000 ce eee eee ooo 366 Terminal and lead through data for the control cables 00000 eee eee 366 Electric power network specification ooooooooooroorrn ee 367 Motor connection Calas siii EAS IA 367 Cone COMNECION Gale oia edil elut 369 Brake resistor connection 5s uice lero rr eRe pees snes 370 Common DG connection uu ox pex E RR DXX ERR ORG tenes keds emcee ee 370 EMISI N ara o 370 Degrees f protection 5 33 9 9 ndo rabia 3 0 Ambient conditions cure cnc ee eee todos y E Teh eee tees Ree Cee ee Ee eee 371 rur de PP
63. dL P Download partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and 58 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download user set 1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 119 and then uploaded to panel Copy user set 2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download user set 2 As dL u1 Download user set 1 above Copy user set 3 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u3 Download user set 2 As dL u1 Download user set 1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 86 Control panels How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Note that the drive has to be in local control for uploading and downloading Sep Aeon O a Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing UZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If REM is shown on the left press first G2 to switch to local control If the panel is n
64. distance braking 3 Speed difference between used speed and maximum speed is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 139 220 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description SPEED COMP Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if FWD the direction of rotation is forward Speed difference between used speed and maximum speed is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 139 If the direction of rotation is reverse the drive is stopped along a ramp SPEED COMP Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if REV the direction of rotation is reverse Speed difference between used speed and maximum speed is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp See section Acceleration and deceleration ramps on page 139 If the direction of rotation is forward the drive is stopped along a ramp 2103 DC MAGN Defines the pre magnetizing time See parameter 2101 TIME START FUNCTION After the start command the drive automatically pre magnetizes the motor for the defined time 0 00 10 00s Magnetizing time Set this value long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively Def
65. drives profile as shown in the following table Note Any correction of the reference see section Reference selection and correction on page 370 is applied before scaling Reference Range Reference type 32767 Speed or 32767 Speed or PID reference 20000 par 1705 0 0 20000 par 1705 20000 corresponds to 100 10000 par 1108 0 0 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 10000 par 1108 0 0 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 10000 par 1708 0 0 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 Final reference limited by 1104 1105 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Final reference limited by 1107 1108 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque 1 or 2016 2018 torque 2 Final reference limited by 4012 4013 PID set 1 or 4112 4113 PID set 2 Note The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 311 B Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 using the parameters in group 10 START STOP DIR Fieldbus references are bipolar ie they can be negative or positive The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus ref
66. factory settings are unipolar voltage for Al1 0 2 10 V and unipolar current for Al2 0 4 20 mA which correspond to the default usage in the application macros The switch is located to the left of I O terminal 9 see the I O terminal figure above Sq Top position ON 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA Bottom position OFF U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V Al Al2 52 Electrical installation Voltage and current connection for analog inputs Bipolar voltage 10 10 V and current 20 20 mA are also possible If a bipolar connection is used instead of a unipolar one see section Programmable analog inputs on page 130 for how to set parameters accordingly Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar Bipolar current E A AL DU L y Use external power supply 10 V GND 10 V PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 CS ra4V eDi 16 Dis External power supply for digital inputs For using an external 24 V supply for the digital inputs see the figure below PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 9 24V 0 V DC 24 V DC pow S n 24 V DC 0 V DC 12 DM 13 DI2 14 DI8_ 15 Da i6 Di5 Frequency input If D
67. for product revision number XXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 ABB MRP code of the drive CE marking and C Tick C UL US RoHS and TUV NORD marks the label of your drive shows the valid markings Operation principle and hardware description 29 Type designation key The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the drive The first digits from the left express the basic configuration for example ACS355 03E 09A7 4 The optional selections are given after that separated by signs for example J404 The explanations of the type designation selections are described below ACS355 03E 09A7 4 J404 ACS355 product series O 1 phase 3 phase 01 1 phase input 03 3 phase input Configuration E EMC filter connected 50 Hz frequency U EMC filter disconnected 60 Hz frequency Output current rating In format xxAy where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part eg 09A7 means 9 7 A For more information see section Hatings on page 358 Input voltage range 2 200 240 VAC 4 380 480 V AC Options B063 IP66 IP67 UL Type 4x enclosure K469 FECA 01 EtherCAT product variant H376 Cable gland kit IP66 IP67 UL Type 4x J400 ACS CP A assistant control panel 1 F278 Input switch kit J404 ACS CP C basic control panel C169 Pressure compensation val
68. functions for collecting the selected time periods 1 4 together 7 MED FUNC 1 SRC TIMED FUNC 4 SRC booster time an additional booster time connected to timed functions A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods Time period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 Timed function 1 3608 START DAY 2 2609 STOP DAY 2 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timed function 2 Time period s N 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 3610 START TIME 3 NS 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 Timed function 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Time period 4 Timed function 4 3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 164 Program features A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one timed function at a time noun 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS ba cos 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS abe 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL a funciona 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 27 TIMED FUNC 2 SR i EST ee 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 with option MREL 01 only 1805 DO SIGNAL 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE 8402 SEQ PROG START 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 8425 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 ST8 TRIG TO ST2 8426 36 46 56 66 76 86 96 ST1 TRIG TO ST N ST8 TRIG TO STN
69. increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 HAMP SHAPE 1 setting 36 180005 Actual signals and parameters 225 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s TIME 1 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ in scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED in vector control to zero The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application the drive should be equipped with a brake resistor Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 2204 RAMP SHAPE Selects the
70. is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three constant speeds To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 3 WIRE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 176 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 51 Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled B Default I O connections X1A 1 So Signal able siese 000 2 Jam a Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 um 6 GND Analog input circuit common I7 AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA O O T eer O ES 9 ve4V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 7 10 GND Audianvotageouputcommon Tit DCOM Digital input common 12 DH Start pulse F X1B 18 RONC a L s poss Digital output max 100 mA 21 poour 7 No fault Fault 1 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp SPEEDS Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in DI3 DI4 Operation parameter Safe torque off connections X1C STO not 0 0 Set speed through AI shown in the diagram are jumpered by default 11 JO Speed 1 1202 jo 1 Speed 2 1203 Speed 3 1204 114 Application macro
71. is counted 1910 COUNT Defines the source for the counter direction selection DIRECTION DI1 INV Counter direction selection through inverted digital input 1 DI1 1 counts up O counts down See selection D 1 INV See selection D 1 INV N 1 1 1 1 UP 1 Q I Z Q 2 Z ee T See selection DI1 INV See selection D 1 INV P Counts up Counter direction selection through digital input DI1 0 1 counts up 1 counts down See selection DIT See selection DIT lli DI1 Dg DI2 DI3 5 DI4 See selection DIT DI See selection DIT DOWN 1911 CNTR S S Selects the source for the drive start stop command when NOT SEL COMMAND parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is set to COUNTER START COUNTER STOP DI1 INV Start stop command through inverted digital input DI1 When parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is COUNTER STOP 0 start Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded When parameter 1001 value is COUNTER START 0 stop Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 has been exceeded See selection D 1 INV See selection D 1 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV NOT SEL Not start stop command source MEE i Q z 214 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Start stop command through digital input DI1 When parameter 7001 EXT1 COMMA
72. it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 42 The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 94 f you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings To stop the drive in local control press CQ The arrow U or 5 on the status line stops rotating To start the drive in local control press lt gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint Control panels 93 B Output mode In the Output mode you can monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 07 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation setthe speed frequency or torque reference e adjust the display contrast Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing ES repeatedly The top right corner of the display shows the reference value The center can be configured to show up to three 0 signal values or bar graphs If DIR 00 00 MENU DIR 00
73. minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNALS PARAM setting 3421 OUTPUTS Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3415 setting 3501 SENSOR Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE TYPE selects the sensor type See also parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS NONE The function is inactive 1x PT100 The function is active The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using two 2 Pt 100 sensors See selection 7 x PT100 3 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using three 3 Pt 100 sensors See selection 7 x PT100 Actual signals and parameters 257 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PTC The function is active The temperature is supervised using one PTC sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature ri
74. nominal power parameter 9909 64 Start up control with I O and ID run Select the motor identification method parameter 9970 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ If your selection is 0 OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON should be selected if the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to perform the ID run value 1 ON continue by following the separate instructions given on page 69 in section How to perform the ID run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 64 Press key amp to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press lt gt to start the drive The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed O Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on Loc the left switch to local control by pressing 2 To go to the Main menu press X if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press CZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys ca N v until you see rEF and press 7 Increase
75. number e xy minor revision numbers e z correction letter Example 190A revision 1 90A MEE Common program revision of the adapter module 5133 FBA APPL FW Displays the application program revision of the adapter module in format axyz where a major revision number xy 2 minor revision numbers e z correction letter Example 190A revision 1 90A Po Application program revision of the adapter module address are not allowed on line 24kbs aa kos 0 1 kbit s must be used in all on line stations BNONEY 8 data bits no parity bit one stoppt p 278 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 5204 OK Number of valid messages received by the drive During PY W sswoES porna oporaton 1e numer nereeses conte 5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the parity settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5206 FRAME Number of characters with a framing error received by the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the communication speed settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5207 BUFFER Number of characters which overflow the buffer ie number OVERRUN
76. of a revolution The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ Identification magnetization is not performed ON ID run Guarantees the best possible control accuracy The ID run takes about one minute An ID run is especially effective when vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback ie without a pulse encoder Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction Note If motor parameters are changed after ID run repeat the ID run WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN 9912 MOTOR NOM Calculated motor nominal torque in N m calculation is TORQUE based on parameter 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER and 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED values 0 3000 0 N m Read only 1 0 1 Nem Actual signals and parameters 299 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9913 MOTOR POLE Ca
77. previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue AN operation in case of a panel communication break 3003 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal NOT SEL FAULT 1 NOT SEL DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1 1 Fault 1 trip on EXT FAULT 1 0014 Motor coasts to stop 0 No external fault 240 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Di Dia D Dis DI INV External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1 0 Fault trip on EXT FAULT 1 0014 Motor coasts to stop 1 No external fault DISUNV 3004 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal NOT SEL FAULT 2 2 Oo DIN zz EEE Def FbEq LEN Q INV See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 3005 MOT THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor FAULT PROT overtemperature is detected NOT SEL Protection is inactive The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP 0009 when the temperature exceeds 110 C and the motor coasts to stop motor temperature exceeds 90 C 3006 MOT THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal TIME model ie the time within which the motor temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors use the rule of thumb Motor thermal time 35 t6 t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacture
78. repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Parameter mode PAr not visible press key 45 or SY until you see PAr and then press 57 The display shows the number of one of the parameter groups Use keys 4 5 and SY 7 to find the desired parameter group Press 57 The display shows one of the parameters in the selected group parameter Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the display shows the value of the parameter with 1 underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible Note When BM is visible pressing keys A and amp 2 simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter PAR F WD value When you have changed the parameter value Use keys 4 5 and SY to select the parameter gt BH starts flashing PAR BE F WO To save the displayed parameter value press sy To cancel the new value and keep the original press Z Use keys 4 5 and SY to find the desired Control panels 83 How to select the monitored signals Step ti n y Output mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 82 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals 1 4 Signal 1 0702 SPEED for macros 3 wire Alternate Motor potentiometer Hand Auto and PID control PAR Bisa F WD 0103 OUTPUT FREQ for macros ABB
79. shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 1 0 0 1 The function is deactivated during emergency stop and LINEAR jogging O LINEAR_ 0 0 Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or 1 1000 0S deceleration and for slow ramps 0 1 1000 0 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for conveyors Carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between A rule of thumb A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1 5 0 0 Speed Linear ramp Par 2204 0s S curve ramp Par 2204 gt 0s gt Par 2202 Par 2204 226 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 2205 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 2 ie the time required for the TIME 2 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ in scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED in vector control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Acceleration time 2 is used also as jogging acceleration time See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Deceleration time 2 is used also as jogging deceleration time See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL 36 18000
80. shield is insufficient smaller than the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable See section Selecting the power cables on page 38 3 For more information on Common DC see ACS355 Common DC application guide 3AUA0000070130 EN Note Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends Route the motor cable input power cable and control cables separately For more information see section Routing the cables on page 41 Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor terminal box 50 Electrical installation B Connection procedure 1 Fasten the grounding conductor PE of the input power cable under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U1 V1 and W1 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 Nem 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 2 Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible Fasten the twisted shield under the g
81. shown Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given Purpose of the manual This manual provides information needed for planning the installation installing commissioning using and servicing the drive 22 Introduction to the manual Contents of this manual The manual consists of the following chapters Safety page 17 gives safety instructions you must follow when installing commissioning operating and servicing the drive Introduction to the manual this chapter page 27 describes applicability target audience purpose and contents of this manual lt also contains a quick installation and commissioning flowchart Operation principle and hardware description page 25 describes the operation principle layout power connections and control interfaces type designation label and type designation information in short Mechanical installation page 31 tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Planning the electrical installation page 37 tells how to check the compatibility of the motor and the drive and select cables protections and cable routing Electrical installation page 47 tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables and control cables Installation checklist page 57 contains a checklist for checking the mechanic
82. signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Alt 1 2 0 176 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to 100 096 maximum mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Alf 100 0 100 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Alf1 1 0 1 1306 EECCA Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See 0 1s parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant Actual signals and parameters 199 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 The relay energizes when the status meets the setting NOT SEL READY Ready to function Run enable signal on no fault supply 1 voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal off UN Running Start signal on Run enable signal on no active 2 fault FAULT 1 Inverted fault Relay is de energized on a fault trip ZU FAULT ALARM REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction STARTED The drive has received start command Relay is energized 7 even if Run enable signal is off Relay is de energized when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs SUPRV1 Status according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER UNDER SUPRV2 Status according to supervision parameters 3204
83. standard and Torque control 1 5 Signal 2 0104 CURRENT Signal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 ie no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A You can select which signals are monitored in the 1 3 PAR F WD PAR F WD Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 0 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for basic control panel For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Select the units to be displayed for the signals This 3 PAR F WD has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNI
84. state 3 to state n State n is defined by parameter 11 8427 ST1 STATE N ST4 TON From state 4 to state n State n is defined by parameter 12 8427 ST1 STATE N ST5 TON From state 5 to state n State n is defined by parameter 13 8427 ST1 STATE N ST6 TON From state 6 to state n State n is defined by parameter 14 8427 ST1 STATE N ST7 TON From state 7 to state n State n is defined by parameter 15 8427 ST1 STATE N ST8 TON From state 8 to state n State n is defined by parameter 16 8427 ST1 STATE N 8416 CYCLE CNT v Selects the source for the cycle counter reset signal 0171 NOT SEL RST SEQ CYCLE CNTR DI INV Reset through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive INV oey See selection DIN CS BIN SeeselcionDH NV Ci oa See selection DITINV CS DIN See selection DIN E Reset through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive ion DI i i 4 See selection D 7 See selection D 1 STATE 1 Reset during state transition to state 1 Counter is reset when the state has been reached STATE 2 Reset during state transition to state 2 Counter is reset when the state has been reached STATE S Reset during state transition to state 3 Counter is reset AAA STATE 4 Reset during state transition to state 4 Counter is reset when the state has been reached STATE 5 Reset during state transition to state 5 Counter is reset when the state has been reached STATE 6 Reset during state transition
85. teen he Ae Pee ew eee Cl heehee Sete ey eee eee Rea 372 Applicable standaltds lt 2 ciedpo 8sb8chareee ov dt debe d etre dob inde dd ke da chads 372 CE marking pocitos ista ad Sees 373 Compliance with the European EMC Directive 0 0000 eee 373 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 2244 eg ge E dene Recte edad Giese pode beds 3 3 PW lt p enredar aa 373 Gategory Ol vestige ed cia pee bee E ELT CE X a e E NR Pare Ree oy 373 Category C2 concreta Pd dx hen ost draco ds e kent Mees 374 Category US ee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee er ee ee 374 UL marking cdas cakes A O ete 375 UL checkliste 2c cee oe sa eee eed ecwa Dedede SaGesndsceksegbsudia nee Re oud 375 ee Ge ros et ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee 376 T V NORD Safety Approved mark sees se re RR p Ree RERO cata 376 14 Table of contents RoHS Marking P T e 376 Compliance with the Machinery Directive llle 376 Patent protection in the USA sopesar seek toe iode nae a SO RC e Co S Rn opu s 377 18 Dimension drawings Frame sizes RO and H1 IP20 cabinet installation ULopen 0000 380 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 eee RR RR RR 381 Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open liliis 382 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 eee RR RR RR RR AR rn 383 Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 2 0 0 o 384 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA1 eee RR RR RR RR
86. the United States branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC and any applicable local codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 367 For installation in Canada branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 367 Power cable selection See section Selecting the power cables on page 38 Power cable connections For the connection diagram and tightening torques see section Connecting the power cables on page 49 Overload protection The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code US Braking The drive has an internal brake chopper When applied with appropriately sized brake resistors the brake chopper will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Brake resistor selection is discussed in Appendix Resistor braking on page 389 376 Technical data C Tick marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable spee
87. the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a gt Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is m the same as indicated on the display FWD S means forward and REV reverse S Press to stop the motor forward direction To change the direction of the motor rotation reverse direction Start up control with I O and ID run 65 Invert the phases by changing the value of Loc parameter 9974 to the opposite ie from 0 NO 9 0 1 4 to 1 YES or vice versa PAR FWD Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above Set the minimum speed parameter 2007 Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 Note Set also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 if two deceleration times will be used in the application The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user macro as instructed in section User macros on page 119 Check that the drive state is OK Basic control panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fa
88. the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2018 MAX TORQUE Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive See 300 parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 0 0 600 0 Value in percent ofthe motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2020 BRAKE Selects the brake chopper control INBUILT CHOPPER When using the drive in a Common DC bus system the parameter must be set to EXTERNAL When in Common DC the drive cannot feed or receive more power than Py INBUILT Internal brake chopper control Note Ensure the brake resistor s is installed and the overvoltage control is switched off by setting parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE EXTERNAL External brake chopper control Note The drive is compatible only with ABB ACS BRK X brake units Note Ensure the brake unit is installed and the overvoltage control is switched off by setting parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE env 8000 099 8009 09 05 8009 05 6000 218 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2021 MAX SPEED Maximum speed source for torque control PAR 2002 SEL PAR 2002 Value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED O0 EXTREF 1 Value of signal 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 21 STA Sta StOD as of the mot 2101 START Selects the motor starting method FUNCTION AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ If flying start is required use
89. the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location EXT2 selected External control location EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN 1 External Run enable signal received ENABLE No external Run enable received Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 319 State diagram The state diagram below describes the start stop function of Control word CW and Status word SW bits for the ABB drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit 1 0 T OFF3 OFF2 ew EIS SW Bit5 0 SW Bit 4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I 0 I y ee Fault From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON OFF1 INPUT POWER OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 SW Bit1 0 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 L2 A B C D NOT READY TE TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 20 CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO HO OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x111 L2 B C D READY TO PO CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION A A State CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxx1 1111 State change gt ie Bit4 1 Path described in example RFG OUTPUT CW Control word D ENABLED SW Status word CW Bit6 0 B E RFG Ramp function generator AE 1111 l Ito Par 0104 CURRENT RFG ACCELERATOR f Par 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed Supported only by ABB DRV FULL os
90. till it COUNTER reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION Motor revolution counter millions of revolutions The CNTR counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0143 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in days Counter cannot 1 1 TIME HI be reset days 0144 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in 2 second ticks 30 122s TIME LO ticks 60 seconds Counter cannot be reset 1 21 0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature Unit depends on the sensor type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 0146 MECH ANGLE Calculated mechanical angle Te 180 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0147 MECH REVS Mechanical revolutions ie the motor shaft revolutions 1 1 calculated by the encoder 0148 ZPLS Encoder zero pulse detector 0 not detected 1 detected 1 1 DETECTED 0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius 1 0 1 C 0 0 150 0 C 0158 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 VALUE 1 0159 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 VALUE 2 0160 DI 1 5 STATUS Status of digital inputs Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off 0161 PULSE INPUT Value of frequency input in Hz FREQ 0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1 1
91. times as much as the error value 262 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4002 INTEGRATION Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller TIME The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable A Error B Error value step C Controller output with gain 1 D Controller output with gain 10 A B D 4001 10 C 4001 1 0 0 NOT SEL Integration time If parameter value is set to zero integration 1 0 1 s 0 1 3600 0s l part of the PID controller is disabled Actual signals and parameters 263 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4003 DERIVATION _ Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Filter time constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Error Process error value 4 t
92. value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT xx Setting range depends on parameter 3407 seting 3407 OUTPUT1 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3401 setting EE 3408 SIGNAL2 Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control PARAM panel in the Output mode See parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 0 NOT Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 Du ud 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected Actual signals and parameters 255 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting EE 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting OM 3411 OUTPUT2DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM ss See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3412 OUTPUT2 Selects the unit for th
93. 0 9800 ft the derating is 296 for every 100 m 330 ft Switching frequency derating by The drive derates itself automatically when parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON Switching Drive voltage rating En Un 200 240 V Un 380 480 V 4kH No derating No derating 8kHz loN derated to 90 loN derated to 75 for RO or to 80 for R1 R4 loy derated to 80 loN derated to 50 for RO or to 65 for R1 R4 and maximum ambient temperature derated to 30 C 86 F loN derated to 75 lo derated to 50 and maximum ambient temperature derated to 30 C 86 F When parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 2 ON LOAD the drive controls the switching frequency towards the selected switching frequency 2606 SWITCHING FREQ if the drive s internal temperature allows Technical data 361 Power cable sizes and fuses Cable dimensioning for rated currents y is shown in the table below together with the corresponding fuse types for short circuit protection of the input power cable The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maximums for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the rated hy current given in section Ratings on page 358 If 150 output power is needed multiply current y by 1 5 See also section Selecting the power cables on page 38 Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends
94. 0 Program features E Example The drive runs a conveyor line It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint the speed will be slightly decreased and vice versa To accomplish the desired speed correction the user activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it tunes the trimming to a suitable level Speed controlled conveyor line Drive rollers pull Tension measurement Simplified block diagram Add Speed reference Trimmed speed PID reference Tension measurement Tension setpoint Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The update cycle for the analog input is 8 ms 12 ms cycle once per second The cycle time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 8 ms gt 2 ms B Settings Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input processing 3001 3021 3022 3107 Al loss supervision Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Al in motor temperature measurement Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Al as PID process control reference or actual value 42 EXT TRIM PID source Program features 131 Additional information 8420 8425 842
95. 0 START STOP DIR 1 e RR RR RR RR RR RR Rx Rhen 185 11 REFERENCE SELECT eee e rrr 187 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 25 ied extet eo ee Pee Se ERE Rete s 192 13 ANALOG INPUTS eeee RR RR RR RR eR Rr 197 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 22 2025 ux ea a REN GUT PET REPRE eeu 199 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS barda toe t te lotes ete det UR v e diete nor e ERR E 202 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS ee rra 203 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT sseee RR RR RR RR erras 209 19 TIMER 8 COUNTER see RR eee Re rrr 210 20 LIMITS ie sse Ru dd A eed ene 214 21 STARIUSIOBRZ seiten quem dax MEI NEIN hes dee eh EE 218 22 AGGEL DEGEL 2 2 b RE weed tebe ok bed ae GN S DNE CENE E EE 223 23 SPEED CONTROL eeee Rr rs 227 24 TORQUE CONTROL 2 zc aed Sade ea ches Bead d whew dae ee x SER Ea YE 230 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 0 0 ccc eee ee eens 231 26 MOTOR CONTROL 0 ccc eee eee ee eee eens 232 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 0 00 ccc RR RR RR hrs 237 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 0 0 0 ccc ee eee eee eens 238 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 0 0 0 ccc eee rr 246 32 SUPERVISION 6 06 mios exe a eet E ade al aoa nw eds So a ae wes 248 33 INFORMATION ss se fe hie rte ere ede tne E id 250 34 PANEL DISPLAY 3 ep een ako wake EU ERE EE dde E EU EE 251 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS se RR eee Rs 256 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS e RR RR RR RH rrr 258 40 PROCESS PIDSET 1 eeeee RR RR RR RR Re e n e re 261 41 PROGESS PID SET 2 ux eee eee Rb eee
96. 0 fStop 1 0 patfowad 0 1 Stanreverse o Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop commands ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 320 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start stop control Timed function 1 active start timed function 1 inactive stop See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI5 4 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI4 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be REQUEST TIMER STOP Stop when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER DELAY has passed Start with timer start signal Source for the signal is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START TIMER START Start when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER DELAY has passed Stop when timer is reset by parameter 1903 TIMER RESET COUNTER Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 STOP COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded Start with counter start signal S
97. 1 O active 1 inactive DI2 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI2 O active 1 inactive 194 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI3 O active 1 inactive DI4 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI4 O active 1 inactive DI5 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI5 O active 1 inactive DI1 2 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 and Dl2 1 DI active 0 DI inactive DH DZOpeaion No constant speed 0 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 S 1 0 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 O Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 DI2 3 INV See selection D 1 2 INV DI3 4 INV See selection D 1 2 INV DI4 5 INV See selection D 1 2 INV DI1 2 3 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 12 DI2 and DI3 1 DI active O DI inactive DI DI2 DIS Operation 0 1 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 7 0 1 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 1 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 1 0 Speed defined by par 1205 CONST SPEED 4 o o Speed defined by par 1
98. 1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals PID CONTROL Language select Motor set up Application Option modules PID control Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals TORQUE CTRL Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals Program features 123 E List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Deserption Setpwamees Motor set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the motor identification If the 9910 speed limits are not in the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed 1103 reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the speed frequency limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration 2202 2203 times Speed control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed 1106 reference If Al1 is used Setting analog
99. 1 Start disable ENABLE 1 through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 START DISABLE 1 1609 START COMM Inverted Start enable 2 Start disable ENABLE 2 through 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 19 START DISABLE2 40032 bit 18 40032 bit 19 40031 bit 15 40031 bit 15 40031 bit 10 Minimum torque limit 1 2 selection through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15 TORQLIM2 Maximum torque limit 1 2 selection through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15 TORQLIM2 2201 ACC DEC Acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 2 SEL selection through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 RAMP 2 306 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control 2209 RAMP Ramp input to zero through 0307 FB 40001 40031 INPUT 0 CMD WORD 1 bit 13 RAMP_IN_0 bit 6 bit 13 with the ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV 3018 COMM NOT SEL Determines the drive action in case 43018 FAULT FUNC FAULT the fieldbus communication is lost CONST SP 7 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM 0 1 Defines the time between the 43019 FAULT TIME 600 0 s communication loss detection and the action selected with parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION PID control reference REF2 40003 for REF2 COMM Al1 COMM AIT Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 307 Fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system a
100. 1502 1503 AO 1503 1502 AO content content XX Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1503 AO1 Defines the maximum value for the signal selected with oe parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN CONTENT SEL setting See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN o o o 3 o gt Actual signals and parameters 203 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1505 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO 20 0 mA AO1 See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 0 0 20 0 mA Maximum value 12 0 1 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO ie the 0 1 s time within which 6396 of a step change is reached See the figure for parameter 1303 FILTER Alf1 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run enable signal NOT SEL NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable signal 1 External signal required through digital input DI1 1 2 Run 1 enable If Run enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running DI See selection DIT See selection DIT See selection DIT See selection DIT Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run enable signal Run disable ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 7 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 The control word is sent by
101. 16 Default I O connections 0 0 0 ccc a 116 PID control macro doth ek cheer cce de DRE d e N 117 Default I O connections sees ee IRR rn 117 Torque control Macro susan adi ees dole oie Dees dls aes 118 Default I O connections o oo ooo 118 User macros ies dr ie hao hatha ba ad wha ada in ad enw abe ag 119 11 Program features What this chapter contains cross pu ke Rx pr ted ete tee REM ER Reb 121 Start up assistant PPP A A a 121 IMPOCUCI N zos MET TTMMT 121 Default order of the tasks eco Leo ra EREX REESE db P ebd tmb dade aa 122 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters 000000 ee eee o 123 Contents of the assistant displays 0000 c cee eee 124 Local control vs external control uu uud eed ka E E dq teehee dle te etre 125 Local CONN CP wUa REM 125 Externalconttol PAS PS RES EREA ANEE E r R I E 126 Settings OR PET PE ERES 126 Bcc ae pesada io a dades 126 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 o oooooooooooooooo o 127 Block diagram Reference source for EXTT o oooocococcccccooo ee 127 Reference types and processing ooooooooronn eee 128 vrai RECO EET 128 DiadhoslieS cx xdg RR RARO SES ER REOR EROR RE d deed a oe sica deed 128 Reference TIMO aae aai ER MESS rieles RARUS eR aes 129 vals d c CPP LM 129 mcis units ba Pee Ane a CESS ERE hte Sane se bea ee SES eee ee 130 Programmable analog inputs 22 co s
102. 2 APPLI T BE 2 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE 96 Control panels Step Aston YO pay To save the new value press S Jo cancel the new value and keep the original press How to select the monitored signals Semen y You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 95 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals Signal 1 0102 SPEED for macros 3 wire Alternate Motor potentiometer Hand Auto and PID control 0103 OUTPUT FREQ for macros ABB standard and Torque control Signal 2 0104 CURRENT Signal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA 2 number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 0 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNALS PARAM Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 D RECT For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT
103. 2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUTS DSP FORM Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT LOC UPAR EDI T 3401 SIGNALI PARAM OUTPUT FREQ 103 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE LOC PAR EDIT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM CURRENT 104 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE LOC PAR EDIT 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM TORQUE 105 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM DI RECT 9 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Hz 3 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Control panels 97 Sem ay Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the LOC OPAR EDIT minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT 3406 OUTPUTI MIN For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 0 H Z Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX CANCEL 100 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 LOC UPAR EDIT OUTPUT2 MAX 3407 OUTPUTI MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 5 7 OUTPUTS MAX CANCEL 100 00 SAVE 98 Control panels B Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up assistant is
104. 2 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Fieldbus references on page 308 for information on the alternative settings 1102 EXT1 EXT2 Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection 40001 40031 SEL through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 bit 11 bit 5 EXT2 with the ABB drives profile Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 305 Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV 1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by 40134 for signal OUTPUT COMM 1 signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0134 1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of the fieldbus 40135 for signal CONTENT reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1to 0135 SEL analog output AO SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV 1601 RUN Enables the control of the inverted 40001 40031 ENABLE Run enable signal Run disable bit 3 bit 6 through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 RUN DISABLE with the ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 INHIBIT OPERATION 1604 FAULT COMM Enables fault reset through the 40001 40031 RESET SEL fieldbus 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 bit 7 bit 4 RESET with the ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 RESET 1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mode lock signal 40031 LOCK through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14 REQ LOCALLOC bit 14 1607 PARAM DONE Saves parameter value changes SAVE SAVE including those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 1608 START COMM Inverted Start enable
105. 20 0307 bit 15 1009 PARPCU 1 6320 0307 bit 15 1015 PAR CUSTOM U F 6320 0307 bit 15 Incorrect analog output AO signal scaling Incorrect motor nominal power setting Incorrect relay output extension parameters Fieldbus control has not been activated Incorrect motor nominal speed frequency setting Incorrect voltage to frequency U f ratio voltage setting CAUSE WHAT TO DO Check parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings Check that following applies 1504 MINIMUM AO lt 1505 MAXIMUM AO 1 Check parameter 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER setting Following must apply 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Pn lt 3 0 Where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in hp Check parameter settings Check that following applies Output relay extension module MREL 01 is connected to drive 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 and 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non zero values See MREL 01 relay output extension module user s manual 8AUA0000035974 English Check fieldbus parameter settings See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 Check parameter settings Following must apply e 1 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor poles 0 992 Check parameter 2610 USER DEFINED U1 261
106. 206 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 Speed defined by par 1207 CONST SPEED 0 0 O Speed defined by par 1208 CONST SPEED DI3 4 5 INV See selection D 1 2 3 INV 1202 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 1 E 5 0 Hz SPEED 1 U 6 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 120 1 Hz MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1203 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 2 E 10 0 Hz SPEED 2 U 12 0 Hz or dri 3 3 4 5 7 4 E 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 120 1 Hz 0 30000 rom MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1204 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency E 15 0 Hz SPEED 3 U 18 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rom Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rom MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm Actual signals and parameters 195 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1205 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 4 E 20 0 Hz SPEED 4 U 24 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rom MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1206 CONST Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 5 E 25 0 Hz SPEED 5 U 30 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rom MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR
107. 3 Maximum Operational functionality and motor cable length recommended The drive is designed to operate with optimum performance with the motor cable length following maximum motor cable lengths The motor cable lengths may be extended with output chokes as shown in the table Frame Maximum motor cable length size m ft mo o w RI RA m o Note In multimotor systems the calculated sum of all motor cable lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in the table 368 Technical data EMC compatibility and motor cable length To comply with the European EMC Directive standard IEC EN 61800 3 use the following maximum motor cable lengths for 4 kHz switching frequency All frame Maximum motor cable length 4 kHz sizes m ft Second environment 30 category C3 Second cad 30 at least 2 100 at least 2 category C3 First som 0 at least 100 at least category C2 First ct 0 at least 0 at least category C1 1 See the terms in section Definitions on page 373 Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive s operational factors Contact your local ABB representative for the exact maximum lengths when using external EMC filters Note 1 The internal EMC filter must be disconnected by removing the EMC screw see the figure on page 48 while using the low leakage current EMC filter LRFI XX Note 2 Radiated emissions are according to C2 with and witho
108. 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through eg a 3 3 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT OVERTEMP Program features 157 Control of a mechanical brake The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped or not powered E Example The figure below shows a brake control application example WARNING Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake A control function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations Note that the frequency converter a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module as defined in IEC 61800 2 is not considered a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonized standards Thus the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature such as the brake control function but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations Brake control logic is integrated l Power supply in the drive application XAB program The user has to take care of the power supply and 117 ROCOM wiring 9 Brake on off control is through E relay output RO Emer
109. 4 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting 1 rpm 0112 EXTERNAL External reference REF2 in percent Depending on the use REF 2 100 equals the maximum motor speed nominal motor torque or maximum process reference 0113 CTRL Active control location 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 See 1 1 section Local control vs external control on page 125 0114 RUN TIME R Elapsed drive running time counter hours Runs when the 1 1 h drive is modulating The counter can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0115 KWH kWh counter The counter value is accumulated till it 1 1kWh COUNTER R reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 The counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0120 Al 1 Relative value of analog input Al1 in percent 1 2 0 1926 0121 AI 2 Relative value of analog input Al2 in percent 1 2 0 196 0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA mA 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 1 2 0 196 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 5 0 196 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings Actual signals and parameters 179 Actual signals No Name Value Description 0129 PID 2 SETPNT
110. 5 2207 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 0 0 The function is deactivated during emergency stop LINEAR 2206 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 2 ie the time required for the TIME 2 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ in scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED in vector control to zero The control mode is During jogging parameter value is set to zero ie linear ramp See 1010 JOGGING SEL 0 1 1000 0 s 2208 EMERG DEC Defines the time within which the drive is stopped if an 1 0s emergency stop is activated See parameter 2109 EMERG SIOP SEL 2209 RAMP INPUT O0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero NOT SEL NOT SEL Not selected Digital input DI1 1 2 ramp input is forced to zero Ramp 1 output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time 0 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 ion DI See selection DI1 See selection DI1 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 320 and ABB drives communication profile on page 375 Actual signals and parameters 227 All parameters No Name Value Description Inve
111. 5 BRAKE MAGN Defines motor magnetizing time After start drive current torque speed is frozen to the value defined by parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 FORCED OPEN LVL for the set time Actual signals and parameters 275 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 NOT SEL magnetizing time If parameter value is set to zero the 1 i1ms 0 10000 ms function is disabled 4306 RUNTIME Defines the brake close speed When frequency falls below 0 0 FREQ LVL the set level during run the brake is closed The brake is re NOT SEL opened when the requirements set by parameters 4301 4305 are met 0 0 NOT SEL Value in percent of the maximum frequency in scalar 0 0 100 0 control or the maximum speed in vector control If parameter value is set to zero the function is disabled The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 4307 BRKOPEN Selects the torque in vector control or current in scalar PAR 4302 LVL SEL control applied at brake release PAR 4302 Value of parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL used MEMORY Torque value in vector control or current value in scalar control saved in parameter 0779 BRAKE TORQUE MEM used Useful in applications where initial torque is needed to prevent unintended movement when the mechanical brake is released 5001 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution 1024 ppr 32 16384 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round ppr 121 ppr
112. 5002 ENCODER Enables the encoder DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE Disabled ENABLE Enabled 1 5003 ENCODER Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in FAULT FAULT communication between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module or between the module and the drive FAULT The drive trips on fault ENCODER ERR 0023 1 ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERROR 2024 2 5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables the encoder zero Z pulse Zero pulse is used for DISABLE position reset DISABLE Disabled ENABLE Enabled 1 5011 POSITION Enables the position reset DISABLE RESET DISABLE Disabled ENABLE Enabled 1 E DI laud 5 i 276 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module OT DEFINED Fieldbus module is not found or it is not properly connected or parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL setting is not EXT FBA PROFIBUS DP Profibus adapter module CANopen CANopen adapter module DEVICENET DeviceNet adapter module 5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module specific For more information see the module manual Note that not all of 5126 FB PAR 26 these parameters are necessarily visible 5127 FBA PAR Validates any changed adapter module configuration REFRESH parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE DONE Refreshing done REFRESH Refreshing 5128 FILE CPI
113. 6 Al as Sequence programming reference or trigger 8430 8435 8436 signal 8490 8495 8496 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0120 0121 Analog input values 1401 Al1 A2 signal loss through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Al1 A2 signal loss through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only Al1 LOSS AI2 LOSS Al1 Al2 signal below limit 3027 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Cal BRE AI2 FAULT LIMIT Alt Fat eae aaoo Al2 LOSS IAD grew AA SST A PRATT signal below limit 3021 A 1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT PAR Al SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 1302 lt 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 Programmable analog output One programmable current output 0 20 mA is available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc The update cycle for the analog output is 2 ms Analog output can be controlled with Sequence programming It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link B Settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0124 0170 AO control values defined by Sequence programming 132 Program features Actual signal Additional information PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling 1503 lt 1502 Programmable digital inputs The drive has five programmable digital inputs The update time for
114. 7 USER DEFINED F4 settings Fault tracing 351 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO PAR SETUP 1 Only two of the Disable frequency output frequency 6320 following can be used input or encoder E simultaneously x afi Le ge transistor output to digital adi nd encoder mode value of parameter 1804 TO pe e MODE 0 DIGITAL or eaen output e change frequency input selection to signal other value in parameter groups 11 REFERENCE SELECT 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and 42 EXT TRIM PID or disable parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE and remove MTAC 01 encoder module 352 Fault tracing Embedded fieldbus faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 58 EFB PROTOCOL parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 1 ERR 0028 E No master device If there is no master device on line parameter 5806 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do e Check that the network master is connected and properly configured e Check the cable connection B Same device address If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5807 EFB CRC ERRORS value increases with every read write command What to do e Check the device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address B Incorrect wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGESS value remains
115. 7 bit 3 CB OVERTEMP 4110 0305 bit 12 SAFE TORQUE OFF FFAO 0307 bit 4 STO1 LOST FFA1 0307 bit 5 STO2 LOST FFA2 0307 bit 6 CAUSE WHAT TO DO Incorrect input power and motor cable connection ie input power cable is connected to drive motor connection Fault can be erroneously declared if drive is faulty or input power is delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large Loaded software is not compatible Drive control board overheated Fault trip limit is 95 C STO Safe torque off requested and it functions correctly Parameter 3025 STO OPERATION is set to react with fault STO Safe torque off input channel 1 has not de energized but channel 2 has Opening contacts on channel 1 might have been damaged or there is a short circuit STO Safe torque off input channel 2 has not de energized but channel 1 has Opening contacts on channel 2 might have been damaged or there is a short circuit Check input power connections Contact your local ABB representative Check for excessive ambient temperature Check for fan failure Check for obstructions in air flow Check the dimensioning and cooling of cabinet If this was not expected reaction to safety circuit interruption check cabling of safety circuit connected to STO terminals X1C If different reaction is required change value of parameter 3025 STO OPERATION Reset fault before start
116. ABB general machinery drives ACS355 drives Z Power and productivity A 4 li for a better world List of related manuals Drive manuals and guides Code English ACS355 user s manual 3AUA0000066143 1 ACS355 drives with IP66 67 UL Type 4x enclosure SAUAO0000066066 1 supplement ACS355 Common DC application guide 3AUA0000070130 4 Option manuals and guides FCAN 01 CANopen adapter module user s manual SAFE68615500 1 FDNA 01 DeviceNet adapter module user s manual SAFE68573360 1 FECA 01 EtherCAT adapter module user s manual 3AUA0000068940 1 1 FENA 01 Ethernet adapter module Modbus TCP protocol 3AUA0000022989 manual FMBA 01 Modbus adapter module user s manual 3AFE68586704 FLON 01 LONWORKSO adapter module user s manual 3AUA0000041017 FPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module user s manual 3AFE68573271 k c cl cl c as FRSA 00 RS 485 adapter board user s manual 3AFE68640300 MFDT 01 FlashDrop user s manual 3AFE68591074 MPOT 01 potentiometer module instructions for 3AFE68591082 3 installation and use MREL 01 relay output extension module user s manual 3AUA0000035974 1 MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module user s manual 3AFE68591091 1 MUL1 R1 installation instructions for ACS150 ACS310 3AFE68642868 13 3 ACS350 and ACS355 MUL1 R3 installation instructions for ACS310 ACS350 3AFE68643147 1 3 and ACS355 MUL1 R4 installation instructions for ACS350 and 3AUA0000025916 1 3 A
117. Activate the critical speeds function Set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below output Hz freterence HZ eee 2502 oR SPEED 1 the minimum limit for critical Ae range 0 0 1 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in rpm Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 0 30000 rom MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ The value cannot be above the maximum parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 2503 uu SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical speed frequency 0 0 Hz range 1 1 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in rpm Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 0 30000 rom MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ The value cannot be below the minimum parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2504 CH SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 Hz 1 rom 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 120 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 Hz HI 1 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 120 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 232 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 Hz LO 1 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 Hz HI 1 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 120 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm dynamic performance of the drive is weakened l 2602 FLUX Activates deactivates the Flux braking funct
118. CONTENT SEL See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Xu Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO 10 16000 Hz Minimum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN 1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO 1000 Hz 10 16000 Hz Maximum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 1 Hz MIN 1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO ie 0 1 s the time within which 63 of a step change is reached 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant Timer ai r start c ntro 1901 TIMER DELAY Defines the time delay for the timer 10 00 s 0 01 120 00 s Delay time 0 1902 TIMER START Selects the source for the timer start signal DIM INV Timer start through inverted digital input DI1 Timer start on the falling edge of digital input DI1 Note Timer start is not possible when reset is active parameter 1903 TIMER RESET E norse No start signal O Actual signals and parameters 211 All parameters o Name Value Description Def FbEq Timer start through digital input DI1 Timer start on the rising 1 edge of digital input DI1 Note Timer start is not possible when reset is active parameter 1903 TIMER RESET See selection D 7 903 TIMER RESET DI1 INV Timer reset through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 1 inactive See selection DI1 INV See selection D
119. CS355 SREA 01 Ethernet adapter module quick start up guide 3AUA0000042902 1 SREA 01 Ethernet adapter module user s manual 3AUA0000042896 2 Maintenance manuals and guides Guide for capacitor reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 3AFE68735190 ACS310 ACS350 ACS355 ACS550 and ACH550 1 2 3 4 Delivered as a printed copy with the drive or optional equipment Delivered in PDF format with the drive or optional equipment Multilingual Available from your local ABB representative Manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet unless otherwise noted See section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the back cover User s Manual ACS355 Table of contents AE n 1 Safety UNE 4 Mechanical installation IR 6 Electrical installation Al 8 Start up control with I O and ID run 3AUA0000066143 Rev A 2010 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved EFFECTIVE 2010 01 01 Table of contents 5 Table of contents List of related manuals 2 52552 eb eens evita oa PORES ee ee Re ba Eee ee Ed oe Race 2 1 Safety What this chapter contains s s s Rex ex hex a E UReREX ERR ek PRES ESE eee ew eae 17 Use or WSIIIDUS 254 nep cur dU lesan eurks bad ae dac S Eddie dubie dar qd 17 Safety in installation and maintenance aaan aaner 18 Electrical Ste ere ir e 18 General Safety ie eee arneses 19 Sale start up and OPeaOn seese ite et erdera bis e bbe eee wake eee oe eee eee FREU es 20 Electrical Sa
120. DLY has elapsed and AI2 value par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value DLY amp AM H1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and Al1 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value DLY amp AM L1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value COMM VAL1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 0 1 state change 70 0 71 COMM VAL1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 1 1 state change 1 O Actual signals and parameters 293 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM VAL1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 6 1 state change 6 COMM VAL1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 7 1 state change 7 Al2H2DI4SV10 State change according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 when Al2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and DI4 is active Al2H2DI5SV10 State change according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 when Al2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and DI5 is active STO State change when STO Safe torque off has been triggered STO 1 State change when STO Safe torque off becomes inactive 81 and the drive operates normally TN 7 7 7 7 7 4 2 3 5 6 7 8 c 8426 ST1 TRIG TO Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the NOT SEL S state from state 1 to state N State N is defined with parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N Note State change to state N 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N has a higher priority
121. E Manufacturer 09 10 11 for 2009 2010 2011 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 A B C for panel revision Integer starting every week from 0001 3 RoHS mark the label of your drive shows the valid markings To find out the panel firmware version of your assistant control panel see page 91 For the basic control panel see page 78 See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different assistant control panels Control panels 75 Basic control panel B Features The basic control panel features numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system 76 Control panels B Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the basic control panel LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu IINE Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV
122. E PE E Motor cable shield To function as a protective conductor the shield must have the same cross sectional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing currents Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core 40 Planning the electrical installation E Additional US requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used The power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor brake resistors and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable Six conductor three phases and three ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cab
123. E SELECT settings Motor ID run is not Check motor connection completed Check start up data group 99 START successfully UP DATA Check maximum speed parameter 2002 It should be at least 80 of motor nominal speed parameter 9908 Ensure ID run has been performed according to instructions in section How to perform the ID run on page 69 Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings stall region due to eg Check fault function parameters excessive load or insufficient motor power External fault 1 Check external devices for faults Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 setting 346 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0015 0016 0017 0018 0021 0022 0023 EXT FAULT 2 9001 0305 bit 14 programmable fault function 3004 EARTH FAULT 2330 0305 bit 15 programmable fault function 3017 UNDERLOAD FF6A 0306 bit 0 programmable fault function 3013 3015 THERM FAIL 5210 0306 bit 1 CURR MEAS 2211 0306 bit 4 SUPPLY PHASE 3130 0306 bit 5 programmable fault function 3076 ENCODER ERR 7301 0306 bit 6 programmable fault function 5003 External fault 2 Drive has detected earth ground fault in motor or motor cable Motor load is too low due to eg release mechanism in driven equipment Drive internal fault Thermistor used for drive internal temperature measurement is open or short circuited Drive inte
124. ER t ANE A z al pd 9 i _ A RESNE A 99 ZN r Installation checklist 57 Installation checklist Checking the installation Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on page 17 of this manual before you work on the drive The ambient operating conditions are allowed See Mechanical installation Checking the installation site on page 37 as well as Technical data Losses cooling data and noise on page 364 and Ambient conditions on page 371 The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non flammable wall See Mechanical installation on page 37 The cooling air will flow freely See Mechanical installation Free space around the drive on page 32 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 38 as well as Technical data Motor connection data on page 367 For ungrounded and corner grounded systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected EMC screw removed The capacitors are
125. ERERE sita deere GRE E RE be 157 Example ei coe sd oe coh a ee Ee E EEEE e EREE LII mts hee 157 Operation Hime SCHEME iussus Roe IER eos See ee wend ete e CR wn 158 O ELT 159 AA 160 JOAO suscribo da std e 161 sig I enews Guta enue eh eutatee etait eed eee es 162 DiAgNOStCS cs nat eres tee o ce eee he eee eee ta oia eee PO 162 Timed TUNCHONS sio grotesca 163 Example osa tras 164 sa Me D uuTT 165 TIME rrr mEET 165 1 O 165 Biens PT ee er er er ee ere et ee re er ee er ee 165 Gud cg Prem 165 sula Re PCR 165 ucc DOTT 166 Sequence programming 2 RR RR RR RR ERR eee RE ERR 166 sius epe PCI TIEREN 166 Diagnosis dao rd TETTE 167 Stale SNIS ANO A E 168 Example T tdi as 169 Example 2 25 22 canfin idad acid sd bdo 170 Safe torque off STO function 5262030042 rta a prd fa 174 12 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains xe om seee E eee 175 Table of contents 11 Terms and abbreviations dvd aede er nre dt kas Pun Beane 175 Fieldbus addresses s ree Gb a Meee eae a eles i 175 Fieldbus equivalent secs iip dee Re Re x es RON ac eb odo b Le ese tet 176 Default values with different macros lle RR IR 176 Act al SIONES C edo INE 178 OIFOPRERAMING DATA careta ios rl oa do e o da og te 178 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 0 0 0 0 cc Re e err 181 04 FAULT HISTORY 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee eens 183 SS A eng eee ees oper ae areas RE E 185 1
126. FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case the analog input signal is lost LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm A 1 LOSS 2006 Al2 LOSS 2007 and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue A operation in case the analog input signal is lost 1 2 3 3002 PANEL COMM Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel FAULT ERR communication break Note When either of the two external control locations are active and start stop and or direction are through the control panel 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 8 KEYPAD the drive follows the speed 1 2 3 reference according to the configuration of the external control locations instead of the value of the last speed or parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS 0010 and the motor coasts to stop CONST SP7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS 2008 and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue AN operation in case of a panel communication break LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS 2008 and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the
127. FB PAR 78 holds the most recent exception code Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 315 Communication profiles The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles e DCU communication profile DCU PROFILE ABB drives limited communication profile ABB DRV LIM ABB drives full communication profile ABB DRV FULL The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and it is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment The ABB drives limited profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface The ABB drives full profile ABB DRV FULL supports two Control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus Embedded fieldbus network RS 232 ElA 485 Drive Actual values ABB DRV LIM ABB DRV FULL Data conversion selected by parameters 5310 5317 DCU PROFILE Control Status word DCU profile g Data conversion 2 for REF1 2 Actual values selected by parameters ABB drives profile DCU profile DCU profile 5310 5317 ABB drives communication profile Two implementations of the ABB drives communication profile are available ABB drives full and ABB drives limited The ABB drives communication profile is active when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV LIM The Control word and Status word for the profile are described below The ABB drives communication profiles can be u
128. FW Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter REV module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive Format is xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number e X correction letter Parameter table revision hex 5129 FILE CONFIG Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive 5130 FILE CONFIG Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision V stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format Example 1 revision 1 0 65535 Mapping file revision 5131 FBA STATUS Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module communication IDLE Adapter is not configured EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actual signals and parameters 277 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the 2 adapter and the drive CONFIG Adapter configuration error The major or minor revision ERROR code of the common program revision in the fieldbus adapter module is not the revision required by the module see parameter 5132 FBA CPI FW REV or mapping file upload has failed more than three times OFF LINE Adapter is off line ON LINE Adapter is on line RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 6 5132 FBACPIFW Displays the common program revision of the adapter REV module in format axyz where a major revision
129. GITAL INPUTS 145 DI3 X1C STO 150 D14 OUTI DI5 can also be used 4166pDI5 OuT242 as a frequency input mn E IN103 6 FlashDrop mm IN20 6 Extension modules MPOW 01 m7 MREL 01 10 MTAC 01 Fieldbus adapter a m i EMC EMC filter grounding screw VAROS Varistor grounding screw PE OPE D L1 a cpm di 4 U1 commen DC U2 CNS MENBNE E L2 dE mm OO HY OO M1 brake V20 O O d Pees 92 _ 9QW1 BRK BRK W20 0 2 3 phase Input EMC ee Output AC motor power choke filter er choke supply 200 480 r9 99 V AC l 95 C Brake resistor 28 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation label The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below AL EP ED F IPIP ACS355 03E 08A8 4 IP20 UL Open type 2 _MMMIIIIIIIINNNUNNNUNNIIINNIIIINNNIIII UL Type 1 with MUL1 option S N MYYWWRXXXX kW 5 HP WHEEL LLL II 37380 480 V 3AUA0000058189 E 10 13 6A RoHS 48 63 H 0 1P08 Z us 3 0 U1 V C E amp G c I2 8 8A 15096 1 10 min IND CONT EQ f2 0 600 Hz Type designation see section Type designation key on page 29 Degree of protection by enclosure IP and UL NEMA Nominal ratings see section Ratings on page 358 4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX where M Manufacturer YY 09 10 11 for 2009 2010 2011 WW 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 R A B C
130. I1 INV OT SEL i Timer reset through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive 1 START Timer reset at start Start signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START START INV Time reset at start inverted ie timer is reset when start signal is deactivated Start signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START RESET External reset eg reset through fieldbus 1904 COUNTER Selects the source for the counter enable signal ENABLE DI1 INV Counter enable signal through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive pew Ses selection DNS DiINV See selection onon DM NV See selection Dany F DiINV See selection onan Counter enable signal through digital input DI1 1 active O 1 inactive See selection D 1 no N aj e PO onl amp S Ww r m See selection DIT See selection DIT 212 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq See selection D 7 ENABLED Counter enabled 1905 COUNTER Defines the counter limit LIMIT INPUT 5 PLS IN DI 5 Digital input DI5 pulses When a pulse is detected the 1 counter value increases by 1 ENC W O DIR Encoder pulse edges When a rising or a falling edge is 2 detected the counter value increases by 1 ENC WITH DIR Encoder pulse edges The direction of rotation is taken into 3 account When a rising or a falling edg
131. I5 is used as a frequency input see section Frequency inputon page 133 for how to set parameters accordingly Electrical installation 53 Connection examples of two wire and three wire sensors Hand Auto PID control and Torque control macros see section Application macros pages 116 117 and 118 respectively use analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams on these pages use an externally powered sensor connections not shown The figures below give examples of connections using a two wire or three wire sensor transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output Note Maximum capability of the auxiliary 24 V 200 mA output must not be exceeded Two wire sensor transmitter X1A 4 20 mA Al2 ird actual value measurement or reference IE 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 9 ea Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC max 200 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply voltage 24 V Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 mA Three wire sensor transmitter X1A Al2 Process actual value measurement or reference 6 GND 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC max 200 mA 54 Electrical installation W Default I O connection diagram The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in use which is se
132. IEC 62061 2005 SILCL 3 The function also corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance with category 0 of IEC 60204 1 The STO may be used where power removal is required to prevent an unexpected start The function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of the drive output stage thus preventing the inverter from generating the voltage required to rotate the motor see the diagram below With this function short time operations like cleaning and or maintenance work on non electrical parts of the machinery can be performed without switching off the power supply to the drive 400 Appendix Safe torque off STO ACS355 5 Safety circuit switch relays etc Control circuit Output stage 1 phase U2 V2 W2 shown Notes A The contacts of the safety circuit must open close within 200 ms of each other The maximum cable length between the drive and the safety switch is 25 m 82 ft WARNING The STO function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and A auxiliary circuits from the drive Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from the main supply Note It is not recommended to stop the drive using the STO If a running drive is stopped with this function the drive will trip and stop by coasting If this is not acceptable eg it causes danger the drive and machinery must be stopped
133. IR LOCK Change of direction is Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION 0308 bit 3 not allowed settings IO COMM Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus 0308 bit 4 communication break communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on programmable fault page 301 chapter Fieldbus control function 3018 3019 with fieldbus adapter on page 325 or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal Check fault function parameter 0308 bit 5 has fallen below limit settings defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal programmable fault 3021 AI1 FAULT levels function 3001 3021 LIMIT Check connections 2007 AI2LOSS Analog input Al2 signal Check fault function parameter 0308 bit 6 has fallen below limit settings defined by parameter i programmable fault 3022 AI2 AULT a for proper analog control signal function 3001 3022 LIMIT Check connections 338 Fault tracing CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2008 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection 0308 bit 7 as active control Check fault function parameters location for drive has programmable fault ceased Check control panel connector function 3002 communicating Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop di
134. KABEL has been tested and approved by ABB B Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 m 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recommended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential 42 Planning the electrical installation A diagram of the cable routing is shown below Drive Input power cable min 200 mm 8 in 90 Control cables Motor cable Powercabla min 300 mm 12 in Motor cable min 500 mm 20 in B Control cable ducts 24 V 230 V Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is insulated for 230 V or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V 24V 230V Lead 24 V and 230 V control c
135. LE to allow chopper operation DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated O0 ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 2006 UNDERVOLT Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ intermediate DC link TIME Ifthe DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor speed the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan See section Motor identification on page 135 DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated ENABLE TIME Undervoltage control activated The undervoltage control is active for 500 ms ENABLE Undervoltage control activated No operation time limit Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency 0 0 Hz A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Note MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 value is gt 0 Allowed Allowed frequency range frequency range frequency range 500 0 500 0 Hz Minimum frequency 120 1Hz 216 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Valu
136. M JOGGING 1 1 Activate jogging 1 Effective if parameter 1010 setting is COMM See section Jogging on page 161 Jogging 1 disabled JOGGING 2 Activate jogging 2 Effective if parameter 1010 setting is COMM See section Jogging on page 161 Jogging 2 disabled Reserved REF CONST 1 Constant speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision lO No operation 322 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU profile Control word parameter 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Name Value 28 REF AVE 1 Average speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision No operation Fieldbus link is down 0 REQ STARTINH Start inhibit jo Nostartinhibit Reserved 29 LINK ON 1 Master detected on fieldbus link This is an internal control bit Only for supervision Status words The following tables describe the Status word content for the DCU profile DCU profile Status word parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Value Drive is ready to receive start command Drive is not ready ENABLED External Run enable signal received No external Run enable signal received STARTED Drive has received start command EN Drive has not received start command RUNNING Drive is modulating MEE Drive is not modulating ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed Wd Drive has not reached zero speed ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating Vp Drive is not accelerating DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating uisi Drive
137. M 4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation NOT SEL signal Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected Digital input DI1 1 active O inactive See selection DIT 2 4214 FBK SEL 4215 FBK 4217 ACT2 INPU 4218 ACT1 4219 ACTI 4220 ACT2 4221 ACT2 Actual signals and parameters 273 All parameters o Name Value Description Def FbEq See selection DIT See selection DIT See selection DIT ON T DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start Start drive running active Activation at drive power up Power up drive powered active IMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function Timed function 1 active PID control active See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 DIZINV DAINV FF 0 4229 SET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output 0 When PID controller is activated controller output starts from the offset value When PID controller is deactivated controller output is reset to the offset value Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL 0O 2 i o o 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct NOT SEL and proportional trimming With trimming it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference See section Reference trimming on page 129
138. MREL 01 only 1805 Supervision status through DO 8425 8426 8435 8436 8495 Sequence programming state change according to 8496 supervision functions Program features 149 Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock B Settings Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE PID control There are two built in PID controllers in the drive Process PID PID1 and External Trim PID PID2 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 2 ms time level B Process controller PID1 PID1 has two separate sets of parameters 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive only parameter set 1 is needed Two different parameter sets 1 and 2 are used eg when the load of the motor changes considerably in time B External Trim cont
139. N rail mounting all frame sizes The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to chapter Dimension drawings on page 379 for frame details B Requirements for the installation site Operation conditions See chapter Technical data on page 357 for the allowed operation conditions of the drive Wall The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible of non flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive 32 Mechanical installation Floor The floor material below the installation should be non flammable Free space around the drive The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm 3 in No free space is required on the sides of the drive so drives can be mounted immediately next to each other Required tools To install the drive you need the following tools screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill if the drive will be installed with screws bolts mounting hardware screws or bolts if the drive will be installed with screws bolts For the number of screws bolts see With screws on page 34 Mechanical installation 33 Unpacking The drive 1 is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R1 shown in the figure e plastic bag 2 including clamping plate also used for I O cables in fra
140. NDS value is COUNTER STOP 1 start Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded When parameter 1001 value is COUNTER START 1 stop Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 has been exceeded be OB D4 DI DI2 DIS DI4 I5 2001 MINIMUM Defines the allowed minimum speed SPEED A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range Speed 2001 value is gt 0 2001 value is lt 0 2002 Allowed Allowed speed range speed range i 2001 0 1600 Allowed speed range 2002 30000 Minimum speed 1 1 rpm 30000 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM Defines the allowed maximum speed See parameter 2001 E 1500 rpm SPEED MINIMUM SPEED U 1800 rpm 030000 rom Maxmumspeed irem 2003 MAX Defines the allowed maximum motor current 1 8 hy A CURRENT All parameters No Name Value 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Actual signals and parameters 215 Description Def FbEq Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the ENABLE intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque Note If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive the controller must be off selection D SAB
141. ORTIE ECH ORO UE RE ROLE OR AR 147 OVEICUIICNT o i ee n eu ode t kee hea SO t doe tec aed edet e ees 147 DC overvolage socorrista lero Eia nd Eau ete die edu tues 147 DC urndsrvollage 26 e2255 265 444 eheenes E ERPIREEOLUEDEERPRCIEDELedidete i 147 Drive temperature ix e eie han JU ede ella ede qoe goal eee qr es 147 Short MM PHP odds 147 Irit rnal fault scebvd teRae6ocHspebeeftereRr bd el eq ERE aS eda eas 147 Operation limits pr X ehe SOUS en Eolo te C ORE LUCERE RE da edge 147 10 Table of contents Settings s rr E 147 ucl C rr ee ee er ee ee Se ee EE 148 AUtalTiBlic TeSBIS oi risas ar po oras 148 siu eR remm 148 DIBQNOSUCS seran do io dae aio a 148 SUPEMISIONS eC dial casa ate aa ees 148 SONGS Em 148 Bici seus ts da il ae es diia 148 Parameter lock 1x22 esa dE SERAIS phos LO AAA eS 149 DOINGS CC rM 149 Ofc EMEN fe ee er ee er ds 149 Process controller PIDI a zocalo ES 149 External Trim controller PID2 sepia a 149 Block diagrami PR lei ra e E 150 clus tps cs ce eet ceca a sapos eae a oes 152 lcm ts ene Se Set ph eRe SSS daa Sa 152 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control 0 00000 153 cupo PUPPI 154 sua d T PEUT 154 Biagio a i da madame f B ander dated pd bead dot dre que iride 154 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O 0000 eee eee 155 cj PET PR PCI 156 Piceni PP Pr o rara ici hard da 156 Control or a mechanical brake 2 22 36d e R
142. RR 4t 385 Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0 0 o 386 Frame size RA P20 NEMAT oscuro Gast ead deeded re eee ert Ooi Bald 387 19 Appendix Resistor braking What this chapter contains edad ach oom x RACER te oO ER RE RE eC bear edE d eie 389 Planning the braking system ied s2 ce roer bees PRES Seed a Rer kde s 389 Selecting the brake resistor 389 Selecting the brake resistor cables 0 000 ee 391 Placing ihe brake resistor i sse pees da A 392 Protecting the system in brake circuit fault situations o oooooooo o 392 Electrical siallavenia os 22min EROR eeexeuad ieatiede cue rhe dvd P wk eben 392 Stat Up 22 PPP PRIM cL TE 392 20 Appendix Extension modules What this chapter contains uses uv eere beet ES REG XE ee ee PES FPE KE 393 Extension MOQuIES s 154 ione RU RE P RU RS EE Pas bid ees beri Qaae itd 393 Deseriplloll ex s eiope x oec rs REEL DEA PETI n eee e SEE DIU a ewes 393 lulu MMC tsi o eee AL eee eng oak ee haat 394 Technical dala x s css etch xr ERREUR ER ria o 396 MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module nananana aeaa 396 MREL 01 output relay module 2 0 ees 396 MPOW 01 auxiliary power module liiis nee 397 Description ratos dos hb ROT Ke dd ee uae det idet is 397 Electrical installation scs sra art date eS OR aede op ei Boe E eae eee ae dene 397 Technical Wald 5 525 ior wm rx Reed par eR ik whee Sees erba uei ace ber Genie 398
143. RV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting OM 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected HI by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit xx Setting range depends on parameter 3201 setting 3204 SUPERV 2 Selects the second supervised signal Supervision limits are 104 PARAM defined by parameters 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO and 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 250 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal LO selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal HI selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting 3207 SUPERV 3 Selects the third supervised signal Supervision limits are PARAM defined by parameters 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO and 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Xo Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the low limit for the third superv
144. Reference decrease Al2 JOY Analog input Al2 as joystick The minimum input signal runs 0 5 the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction Minimum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF 1 MAX See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT selection Al1 JOYST for more information E E 0 0 100 0 Constant speed 1 8421 ST1 Selects the start stop and direction for state 1 Parameter DRIVE COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS must be set to SEQ PROG STOP Note If change of direction of rotation is required parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST A A A o ho o N eet i c 0 4 0 1 0 1 288 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DRIVE STOP Drive coast or ramps to stop depending on parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION setting START FRW Direction or rotation is fixed to forward If the drive is not already running it is started according to parameter 2707 START FUNCTION settings START REV Direction or rotation is fixed to reverse If the drive is not already running it is started according to parameter 2707 START FUNCTION settings 8422 ST1 RAMP Selects the acceleration deceleration ramp time for Sequence programming state 1 ie defines the rate of the reference change 0 2 0 1 Time 0 0 1800 0S When value is set to 0 2 ramp pair 2 is used Ramp pai
145. S of characters which exceed the maximum message length 128 bytes 0 65535 Number of characters 5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device Two units with the same 1 ID address are not allowed on line 0247 5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link 9 6 kb s RATE 0 1 ket The same setting must be used in i d line stations 8 NONE 1 No parity bit one stop bit 8 data bits O Actual signals and parameters 279 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8 NONE 2 No parity bit two stop bits 8 data bits 1 8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits 2 8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits 5305 EFB CTRL Selects the communication profile See section PROFILE Communication profiles on page 315 DCU PROFILE DCU profile 1 ABB DRV ABB drives profile 2 FULL 5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive During MESSAGES normal operation this number increases constantly 0 65535 Number of messages 1 1 5307 EFB CRC Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy ERRORS check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors
146. S 232 is designed for a point to point application a single master controlling one slave EIA 485 is designed for a multipoint application a single master controlling one or more slaves 302 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus controller Fieldbus panel connector 1 Embedded fieldbus Modbus connection is either RS 232 or ElA 485 FMBA 01 ElA 485 1 Modbus adapter Data flow lt 4 Control word CW lt a References Status word SW 3 gt Actual values 9 Parameter R W requests responses Process I O cyclic Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources eg digital and analog inputs Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 303 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the FMBA 01 Modbus adapter if used must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in section Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 35 and the module manual The communication through the fieldbus link is initialized by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232 The communication parameters in grou
147. SEL OUTPUT 3 the MREL 01 relay output extension module is connected to the drive 1404 RO 1 ON Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1 DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time The figure below illustrates the operation on and release off delays for relay output RO Control event dA L Relay status E EA E gt te 1404 On delay 1405 Off delay 1405 RO 1 OFF Defines the release delay for relay output RO 1 DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON E 0 1S DELAY 202 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1406 RO 2 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1409 RO 3 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1410 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 4 the MREL 01 relay output extension module is connected to the drive 1413 RO 4 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1501 AO1 Connects a drive signal to analog output AO 103 CONTENT SEL X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED Defines the minimum value for the signal selected with CONTENT MIN parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL AO minimum and maximum correspond to the 1504 MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO 1 settings as follows
148. SEQ PROG AO VAL Value can be connected to control analog output AO by setting parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL value to 170 ie signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL AO value is frozen to this value until it is zeroed 8424 ST1 CHANGE Defines the delay time for state 1 When delay has elapsed DLY state transition is allowed See parameters 8425 ST1 THIG TO ST 2and 8426 ST1 TRIG TO STN 8425 ST1 TRIG TO Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the NOT SEL ST2 state from state 1 to state 2 Note State change to state N 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N has a higher priority than state change to the next state 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 Trigger through inverted digital input DI1 0 active 1 1 inactive DIZUNV DISUNV DIA NV No trigger signal If parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N setting is also NOT SEL the state is frozen and can be reset only with parameter 8402 SEQ PROG START Trigger through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive i i ill ili See selection DIT See selection DIT D Al 1 LOW 1 State change when Al1 value par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value Al 1 HIGH 1 State change when Al1 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 7 value Al 2 LOW 1 State change when AI2 value par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value Al 2 HIGH 1 State change when AI2 value par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value Ali OR 2 LO1 State change when Al1 or AI2 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 10 LOW value Al1LO1AI2HI1 State change when
149. SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 32 value or after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed AI2LO1 ORDLY State change when Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 33 value or after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed AI1HI2 ORDLY State change when Al1 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 34 value or after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed 14 15 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 oO Actual signals and parameters 291 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq AI2LO2 ORDLY State change when Al2 value par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 35 value or after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed SUPRV1 Logic value according to supervision parameters OVER 3201 3203 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 Logic value according to supervision parameters 3 OVER 3204 3206 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 Logic value according to supervision parameters 3 OVER 3207 3209 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 3 UNDER SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV2 OVER 4 UNDER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV3 OVER 4 UNDER SPV1OVRORD State change according to supervision parameters 2 3201 3203 or when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION 7 8 9 0 1 LY SPV2OVRORD State change according to supervision parameters LY 3204 3206 or
150. SKI Rusan OOo f POLSK T RK E CZECH MAGYAR ELLINIKA 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro See chapter Application MACRO macros on page 109 Actual signals and parameters 295 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ABB Standard macro for constant speed applications STANDARD 3 WIRE 3 wire macro for constant speed applications ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse applications MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control applications HAND AUTO jHand Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 5 connected to the drive Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT1 Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2 EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time Switching between EXT1 2 through digital input PID CONTROL PID control For applications in which the drive controls a process value eg pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive TORQUE Torque control macro CTRL LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list eg selected parameters can
151. T PAR BE F WD 84 Control panels Sem aay Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum display values This has no 0 O effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 PAR F WD DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 LOC D 0 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX PAR F WD Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 OUTPUTS MAX Control panels 85 Copy mode The basic control panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to three user sets of drive parameters to the control panel Uploading and downloading can be performed in local control The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can do the following Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID run Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download all This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive
152. T 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 3 FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque USER MACRO User macro 2 is active 2 COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de 35 energize output 1 energize output 0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 value MREL MREL MREL 0 0000 o 0 0 Of Oo 1 j001 0 0 0 Of tf 3 00011 0 530 o oo COMM 1 Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de energize output 1 energize output 0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 value MREL MREL MREL P20 00000 E 1 1 117 17 i 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 34 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 37 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 Timed function 2 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 38 FUNCTIONS Co o Actual signals and parameters 201 All parameters No Name Value DESCHIBUDD Def FbEq anal ids FUNCTIONS Cooling fan running time counter is triggered See uu parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG MAINTENANCE TRIG MAINTENANCE TRIG MAINTENANCE TRIG parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL 43 MECH BRK CONTROL SEL STO Safe torque off has been triggered STO 1 STO Safe torque off is inactive and the drive operates 58 normally 1402 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT2 the MREL 01 relay output extension module is connected to the drive 1403 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT
153. T communication is lost CONST SP 7 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT 0 1 60 0s Defines the time between the communication IM loss detection and the action selected with parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION 4010 SET POINT COMM PID control reference REF2 4110 SEL COMM Al1 iis COMM A11 330 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit input and output data words The drive supports at the maximum the use of 10 data words in each direction Data transformed from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameter group 54 FBA DATA IN and data transformed from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameter group 55 FBA DATA OUT Fieldbus network Fieldbus module Start stop dir select 1001 1002 REF1 select Data in Fieldbus specific E we 1 interface 5401 5410 Data out select 5501 5510 1 REF select Some fieldbus adapters map this data automatically For the use of virtual addresses see the user s manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter 2 See also other COMM selection parameters B Control word and Status word The Control word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive
154. The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control word The Status word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 331 EB References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference indicating reversed direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as speed or frequency reference B Actual values Actual values ACT are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Communication profile The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter supports the DCU communication profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits Fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Drive network Industry standard drive profile eg PROFIdrive Data conversion ABB drives Data conversion Transparent 16 Optional reference actual value scaling Transparent 32 1 DCU profile 2 Selection through fieldbus adapter configuration parameters parameter group 51 EXT COMM MODULE For the DCU profile Control and Status word contents see section DCU communication profile on page 320 332 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Fieldbus references B Reference selection and correction Fieldbus referen
155. UEST FORWARD Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop keys are disabled DI1P 2P 3 Pulse start through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start In order to 4 start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction through digital input DI3 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be HEQUEST Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop keys are disabled DI1P 2P 3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start 5 forward Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2 0 gt 1 Start reverse In order to start the drive digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 DI2 Pulse stop through digital input DI3 1 gt 0 Stop To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI3 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop keys are disabled 186 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq KEYPAD Start stop and direction commands through control panel when EXT1 is active To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1F 2R Start stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 DH Diz Operation 0
156. ULT Code of the latest fault See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 for the codes 0 Fault history is clear on panel display NO RECORD 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 184 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals No Name Value Description 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred Format on the assistant control panel Real time hh mm ss if the real time clock is operating Time elapsed after the power on hh mm ss minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the basic control panel Time elapsed after power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 30 ticks 60 seconds Eg value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 1 0 1V S ESSE famosua A 0408 TORQUE AT Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque atthe 1 0 196 0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest 0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1
157. XIT 100 00 SAVE If you select the Start up assistant it activates the first C CHO CE assistant which guides you through the task of i u want to specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 e n Da jg and 5 below The Start up assistant then asks if you e want to continue with the next assistant or skip it select Lp the appropriate answer with keys 45 and lt gt and EXIT 100 00 OK press If you choose to skip the Start up assistant asks the same question about the next assistant and so on Control panels 99 Sem ay A LOC UPAR EDI T 9905 SY To specify a new value press keys 45 and Cv To ask for information on the requested parameter press key Scroll the help text with keys AS and LY Close the help by pressing ez To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter press To stop the assistant press ae EXIT 100 NOM VOLT V 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 9906 MOTOR EXIT 100 NOM CURR 00 SAVE 100 Control panels E Changed parameters mode In the Changed parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e change these parameters Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Sen A Go to the Main menu by pressing 7 if you are in the LOC zu N ME NU Output mode otherwise b
158. a graphical Sequence programming tool Note By default all Sequence programming parameters can be changed even when the Sequence programming is active It is recommended that after the Sequence programming parameters are set parameters are locked with parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK B Settings Additional information 1001 1002 Start stop and direction commands for EXT1 EXT2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 selection 1106 REF2 source 1201 Constant speed deactivation Constant speed always overrides the Sequence programming reference 1401 Sequence programming output through RO 1 Program features 167 Additional information 1402 1403 1410 Sequence programming output through relay output RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1501 Sequence programming output through AO 1601 Run enable activation deactivation 1805 Sequence programming output through DO E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0167 Sequence programming status 0168 Sequence programming active state 0169 Current state time counter 0170 Analog output PID reference control values 0171 Executed sequence counter 168 Program features B State shifts 0167 bit 0 1 equence programming ENABLE STATE 1 par 8420 8424 Y Go to state N par 8426 8427 STATE 2 State N par 8430 8434 d Go to state N par 8436 8437 Go to state 3 par 8435 STATE 3 State N par 8440 8444 c Go to state N pa
159. ables in separate ducts inside the cabinet Planning the electrical installation 43 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload W Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diagram Short circuit protection Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and input board cable with fuses or a circuit breaker See VA ES footnotes 1 and 2 PAS 1 Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 357 The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers Contact your local ABB representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions B Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situatio
160. ad arde tbh R aa SRS oR EE Sede ERE VO TEHININGIS PPM ds die Pee oho eee eee boo Ge bo eee Re ae Default I O connection diagram 00 0 0 cee ranae iret astas derredor rebeca 7 Installation checklist Checking the installati n scossirrtosdon irc ever brida dr Table of contents 7 8 Start up control with I O and ID run What this chapter contains 2 2 xxx RERO eor be p ERR x ex eR ea ac at 59 How to start Up the AVE assa sis creatina 9E P Hoe et dE Cauet ird 59 How to start up the drive without a control panel ccoccocoococcoo 60 How to perform a manual Start up liilllleeee ee 61 How to perform a guided start up 0 0 ccc ee eee teens 66 How to control the drive through the I O interface llle 68 How to perform the ID run zzi ess der ble EE EX ok pe Se Senet eee a es 69 ID r m procsd re suse sea Fx REESE ERES Oh wa S SERO d etc ados OS pa oe Re 69 9 Control panels What this chapter contains 234299 1 95 943 B xioe odd iad b ed d fct dro OSEE d Red do andar 73 Ao t contro Panels curas dais saws e dew tddi bai dad 73 Applicability cn e Ena cane a ce chee p RE a 73 Basic controlpanel crucial dada das 75 aus isobaras 75 EMI A eee E ts ta Be ea ee Bee 76 Operation Tr 77 COHIDUL Mde srt serrat AA 80 Reference mode one gy pEEE E o o RU 81 Parameler Mode as ese need ex Re REOR REED Roe E SR Rb Sox Rod ta ox Sake esa dt OR 82 CODY Mode 4 EET P EET 85 Basic control panel alarm codes
161. age 115 345 V Note The stress on the motor insulations is always 400 VE units dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to 200 600 V the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the 400 VU units rating of the drive and the supply of the drive 230 690 V 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency ie the frequency at E 50 0 Hz which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage U 60 0 Hz Field weakening point Nom frequency Supply voltage Motor nom voltage 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed Must be equal to the Type SPEED value on the motor rating plate dependent 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on Py POWER the motor rating plate 298 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the OFF IDM Motor ID run During this process the drive operates the AGN motor and makes measurements to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations OFF IDMAGN The Motor ID run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating except that a permanent magnet motor can rotate a fraction
162. al and electrical installation of the drive Start up control with I O and ID run page 59 tells how to start up the drive as well as how to start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor speed through the I O interface Control panels page 73 describes the control panel keys LED indicators and display fields and tells how to use the panel for control monitoring and changing the settings Application macros page 109 gives a brief description of each application macro together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections It also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Program features page 121 describes program features with lists of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Actual signals and parameters page 175 describes actual signals and parameters It also lists the default values for the different macros Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus page 301 tells how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter page 325 tells how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using a fieldbus adapter Fault tracing page 335 tells how to reset faults and view fault history It lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Introduction to the manual 23 Main
163. als and parameters 181 Description Status of the relays in the MREL 01 relay output extension module See MREL 01 relay output extension module user s manual 3AUA0000035974 English Example 100 RO 2 is on RO 3 and RO 4 are off Vector control Torque value 0 180 of the motor nominal 1 0 1 torque saved before the mechanical brake is taken in use Scalar control Current value 0 180 of the motor nominal current saved before the mechanical brake is taken in use This torque or current is applied when the drive is started See parameter 4307 BRK OPEN LVL SEL Monitors the synchronization of the measured position with the estimated position for permanent magnet motors 0 NOT SYNC 1 SYNC A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 320 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 320 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 320 A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 235 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 320 182 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals No Name Value Description Bit 14 EXT FAULT 2 A Bit 15 EARTH FAULT 0306 Tad WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 299 0307 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the poss
164. alues The table below shows the parameter default values for different macros For other parameters the default values are the same for all macros Shown in the parameter list starting on page 785 Name ABB ALTERNA MOTOR HAND PID TORQUE sese _ stawano te por gt auro CONTROL CONTROL 9902 APPLIC 1 2 5 6 7 ES ee e Eos STANDARD CONTROL CTRL 001 EXT1 2 DI1 2 4 9 DHE2R 2 DI1 2 2 DIT 2 71 2 eee EL Pll lll 002 EXT2 0 NOT O NOT O NOT O NOT 21 2Dl54 20 DI5 2 DI1 2 at err E fer erar peer cnr pe 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST bn adis penna EXT1 coegi EXT1 0 EXT1 ee EXT1 3 DI3 2 m 3 DI3 SEL 1103 REF1 SELECT iil Hac 1 All ila 1 AN uil 1 AN p 4D N 106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 AI2 2 udi 2 AI2 2 indi 2 Al2 19 2 AI2 aes Pe p ee boo E 201 CONST 9 DI3 4 M0 2DIl45 9 DI3 4 5 DI5 0 NOT 8 DI3 4 DI4 MEP roni un eL A E e 1501 AO1 103 102 102 102 102 102 102 La m ee co 16011RUN ENABLE D2 NOT 0O NOT O NOT O NOT 0 NOT 4 DI4 0 NOT es Set e Ber n er oos eoo 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 5 DI5 0 NOT 5 DI5 0 NOT O NOT O NOT 5 DI5 i a o oo puo peo go ouo 3201 SUPERV 1 102 102 102 102 sf i fe h O liil Por mM 9904 MOTOR CTRL uM ia a sal E uM MODE SCALAR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED TORQ Note It is possible to control several functions with one input DI or Al and there is
165. ameter value is set to zero the trigger 1 6553 5 MWh is disabled 0 1 MWh 2908 USER MWh Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption 0 0 MWh ACT counter When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 00 0 Megawatt hours Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh ll 3001 AI MIN Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal NOT SEL FUNCTION drops below the fault limits and Al is used as the active reference source group 11 REFERENCE SELECT as the process or external PID controllers feedback or setpoint source group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2or 42 EXT TRIM PID and the corresponding PID controller is active 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits NOT SEL Protection is inactive Actual signals and parameters 239 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq FAULT The drive trips on fault A 1 LOSS 0007 Al2 LOSS 0008 and the motor coasts to stop Fault limit is defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT CONSTSP 7 The drive generates alarm A 7 LOSS 2006 Al2 LOSS 2007 and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Al2
166. art and eg a mechanical brake release The Automatic start feature and DC magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time B Settings Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME Program features 137 Maintenance trigger A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point B Settings Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG DC hold With the motor DC hold feature it is possible Motor speed to lock the rotor at zero speed When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold speed the normal drive operation resumes B Settings Parameters 2101 2106 Speed compensated stop Speed compensation stop is available eg for applications where a conveyer needs to travel Motor speed a certain distance after receiving the stop Stop command command At maximum speed the motor is Max L Area Aeon B stopped normally along the defined deceleration ramp Below maximum speed stop is delayed by running the drive at current speed before the motor is ramped to a stop As shown in the figure the distance travelled after the stop command is the same in both cases ie area A equals area B Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction
167. ation on the thermal model see section Motor thermal protection on page 745 For more information on the temperature measurement function see section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 155 Implementing the Safe torque off STO function See Appendix Safe torque off STO on page 399 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive ACS355 01x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type A ACS355 03x drives with residual current devices of Type B For ACS355 03x drives other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact such as separation from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by a transformer can also be applied Using a safety switch between the drive and the motor It is recommended to install a safety switch between the permanent magnet motor and the drive output This is needed to isolate the motor from the drive during maintenance work on the drive Implementing a bypass connection WARNING Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive Planning the electrical installation 45 If frequent bypassing is required employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and drive output terminals simultaneously Prote
168. bceiscdSebbSi deat edede hod pid E EE Parvo pus 130 scu PP DLL 130 DiagNOS CS s cxx RR RCNH ROC ECL RC o EOS Ro SHE dedo era desse Rob eie 131 Programmable analog output 2 ERE CREE UE Ae mERERE IS EE a 131 scan I II 131 HA pvc ETT 131 Programmable digital inputs zona Race dC PE bad dd drive 132 Se ee ee eee ee ee eee er ee eres ee ee S 132 BISOUS errete Eier tees eee ed abe tee ed Se E AU EA e a 132 Programmable relay output 26 0 a2 date Segeee dad Gee eee aC ehe doa odo eee Sa io 133 sig st Bil EM 133 E A A A 133 Freq en y INpUL sass os daras a WS LoS Sete yokes Soe ob SSS an we ba kee god 133 SENOS li ll ro BAL ee TET 133 Plc cura sirbe e eee 133 TransiStorQuiBl t2ccianeseeunatiehade sete din whuads cc ib 134 Settings oia Coed ead Bead 134 Bie cine D tno ed oai ent eradie aha EE hee Eee E E EA E adie 134 Ol Ea ls yl AAA Pr 134 A ke aE A e R a E a a a E aaa a Bee aad iad 134 Bic ci P nE a Ea EDES ure a EE E eE EE E E 135 Motor Ide ntitiGation zu snes een ee Sh A Bee ee eee eS 135 Table of contents 9 uiis cm 135 Power loss ride IDrougl 355 cu cir soriana Rex d e RR OP OR PR eR G 136 wu iaa 136 DC magnetizing e rait ey pere terete Eb rebote etc xe tes 136 apo ri erat a a ae ce 136 Maintenance trigger escenas rola rr il aa 137 e En 137 er ios at ee eee eres 137 vias m RT PLE 137 Speed compensated stop 0 0c cc rn 137 A 137 xis di cisco RI y aaa ees 138 DOINGS il ea 015 1 1555 DA des 139 Flux optimi
169. ce called COMM in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a reference selection parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT to COMM COMM Al1 or COMM AI1 When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM Al1 or COMM AI1 the fieldbus reference is corrected using analog input Al1 as shown in the following examples for the DCU profile With the DCU profile the fieldbus reference type can be Hz rpm or percent In the following examples the reference is in rpm Setting When COMM gt 0 rpm When COMM 0 rpm COMM COMW 1000 Al 50 MAX MIN COMM 1000 Al 50 MAX MIN Corrected reference rpm n COMM Max limit REF 1500000 750000 Min limit Min limit 750000 1500000 Max limit Corrected reference rpm Corrected reference rpm 1500000 750000 Max limit Min limit Min limit Max limit 750000 1500000 Corrected reference rpm Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 333 When COMM gt 0 rpm When COMM lt 0 rpm COMM 1000 Al 50 COMM COMM 1000 Al 50 Al Corrected reference rpm Max limit e 4 Al 5096 4 Al 100 Min li
170. ce internal to zero along a ramp State change conditions Symbol mmm k Brake control active 0 gt 1 OR Inverter is modulating 0 2 Motor magnetised 1 AND Drive running 1 3 Brake is open AND Brake open delay passed AND Start 1 4 Start 0 5 Start 0 6 Start 1 7 Actual motor speed lt Brake close speed AND Start 0 8 Start 1 9 Brake is closed AND Brake close delay passed 1 AND Start 0 160 Program features B Settings Parameter Additional information 1401 1805 Mechanical brake activation through RO 1 DO 1402 1403 1410 Mechanical brake activation through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 2112 Zero speed delay Group 43 MECH BRK CONTROL Brake function settings Program features 161 Jogging The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine section One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle When it is on the drive starts accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate When it is off the drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive They also represent how the drive shifts to normal operation jogging inactive when the drive start command is switched on Jog cmd State of the jogging input Start cmd State of the drive start command The function operates on a 2 ms time level Speed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 gt 10 11 12 1314 15 16 Description ema 1
171. counter is reset 0 0 3600 0s Sleep start delay 270 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation for the sleep function The drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from the PID reference value exceeds the set wake up deviation 4025 longer than the wake up delay 4026 Wake up level depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings If parameter 4005 is set to 0 Wake up level PID reference 4070 Wake up deviation 4025 If parameter 4005 is set to 1 Wake up level PID reference 4070 Wake up deviation 4025 Wake up level when 4005 1 PID reference Wake up level when 4005 0 t See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4026 WAKE UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4026 WAKE UP Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See DELAY parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 00 60 00 s Wake up delay 1 0 01s 4027 PID 1 PARAM Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal X X SET that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2 PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101 4126 SET 1 PID SET 1 is active Digital input DI1 1 PID SET 2 0 PID SET 1 See selection DI1 See selection Dl1 SET 2 PID SET 2 is active IMED FUNC 1 Ti
172. cro can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Note User macro load restores the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between three motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for each motor and then to save the data as three user macros When the motor is changed only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate 120 Application macros Program features 121 Program features What this chapter contains The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Start up assistant B Introduction The Start up assistant requires the assistant control panel guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up assistant also checks that the entered values are valid ie within the allowed range The Start up assistant calls other assistants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive suggests
173. cting the contacts of relay outputs Inductive loads relays contactors motors cause voltage transients when switched off Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If not suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the I O terminal block Varistor 4 Drive 230 V AC relay output RC filter i Drive 230 V AC relay output Diode f Drive 24 V DC relay output 46 Planning the electrical installation Electrical installation 47 Electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables and control cables WARNING The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a L N qualified electrician Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 17 Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation If the drive is already connected to the input power wait for 5 minutes aft
174. d at zero speed in percent of 1 196 the nominal motor current 242 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3009 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 Hz LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 3008 have default values ly Output current In Nominal motor current fo Output frequency fark Break point frequency A Trip time 1 250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100 load Actual signals and parameters 243 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3010 STALL Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition The NOT SEL FUNCTION protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall region see the figure below longer than the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME In vector control the user defined limit 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 applies for positive and negative torques In scalar control the user defined limit 2003 MAX CURRENT The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Torque Current A Stall region 0 95 User defined limit NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL 0012 and the motor coasts to stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL 2012 2 3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function See FREQUENCY paramete
175. d electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products For fulfilling the requirements of the standard see section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 373 TUV NORD Safety Approved mark The presence of the TUV NORD Safety Approved mark verifies that the drive has been evaluated and certified by TUV NORD according to the following standards for the realization of the Safe torque off function STO IEC 61508 1 1998 IEC 61508 2 2000 SIL3 IEC 62061 2005 and ISO 13849 1 2006 See Appendix Safe torque off STO RoHS marking The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European RoHS Directive RoHS the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Compliance with the Machinery Directive The drive is intended to be incorporated into machinery to constitute machinery covered by Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC and does therefore not in ev
176. d for traverse control with 30 sequences Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1 ST1 Drive is started in forward direction with Al1 Al1 50 50 reference and ramp pair 2 State shifts to the next state when reference is reached All relay and analog outputs are cleared Program features 171 ST2 Drive is accelerated with Al1 15 Al1 65 50 reference and 1 5 s ramp time State shifts to the next state when reference is reached If reference is not reached within 2 s state shifts to state 8 error state ST3 Drive is decelerated with Al1 10 Al1 60 50 reference and 0 s ramp time State shifts to the next state when reference is reached If reference is not reached within 0 2 s state shifts to state 8 error state ST4 Drive is decelerated with Al1 15 Al1 35 50 reference and 1 5 s ramp time State shifts to the next state when reference is reached If reference is not reached within 2 s state shifts to state 8 error state 2 ST5 Drive is accelerated with Al1 10 Al1 40 50 reference and 0 s ramp time State shifts to the next state when reference is reached Sequence counter value is increased by 1 If sequence counter elapses state shifts to state 7 Sequence completed ST6 Drive reference and ramp times are the same as in state 2 Drive state shifts immediately to state 2 delay time is O s ST7 sequence completed Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1 Digital ou
177. deb db dose d 271 42 EXI 7 TRIM PID i uo terere Renee ha etat centre ee pa ter hin bp 272 43 MECH BRK CONTROL sseeee RR RR RR RR x Rr 274 50 ENGODBDEEBU ter etico E EE M d UE a ec 275 51 EXT COMM MODULE es RR RR RR RR RR RR RR RR eH rrr 276 52 PANEL COMM ssee RR RR RR rs 277 0 EFB PROTOCOL 2 rr ee eas imm LM EA EUM LEE 278 BA FBA DATA IN uet ERR e eot Veto A ke oda aO edid 280 09 EBA DATA OUDS ecos ee es eres xh ttr e re dE De sae 280 84 SEQUENGE PROG cunas pu pde RE uU E es 281 98 OPTIONS ist RR dared Reese ce des o QR E ue et et edd 294 99 START UP DATA o ttm io dba he oe heehee ae owe banus aed 294 13 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains cse2ccusdieuceedee arder rales 301 System OV NVIEW ss sono ran Ey REER E EER EREEREER E O EER 301 12 Table of contents Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus 0020000 303 Drive control parameters 2c2c0santeevadee CR PR m RO DR dO be cuo c RC ch n 304 Fieldbus control interface a corsa Rai dox ac E cR e sede cre digeesees 307 Control Word and Status word 222 vee ioecdovte dai d Eb wee loi ghee Re ER 307 siia ee ee ee ee er ee ee ee ee er ee 307 Actual values auroras A ARA 307 Fieldbus references toos iii xe ERE x Kette teehee e 308 Reference selection and correction ooooooooononrnrr eee 308 Fieldbus reference scaling cece tee tee eee 310 Reference handling sesso ike
178. ding to parameters 2205 and 2206 360 degree grounding under a clamp Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 4j 56 Electrical installation Bl de 10 Connection procedure Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame Analog signals Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Digital signals Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in For double shielded cables twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically Unless you need to install the optional fieldbus module see section Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 35 slide the terminal cover back in place Connect STO conductors to the appropriate terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in XIC STO O 1234 e c c2 c2 P W O TI el 1 Dangerous voltage POW
179. divided into assistants each of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set for example Motor set up or PID control The Start up assistant activates the assistants one after the other You may also use the assistants independently For more information on the tasks of the assistants see section Start up assistant on page 121 In the Assistants mode you can Use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor set up assistant is used as an example sep Acton DON Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC OMAIN ME NU Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly ez until Sh Y you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu keys A 5 and S v 7 and pressing 7 Select the assistant with keys aS and SY 7 and LOC OPAR EDIT press Sul If you select any other assistant than the Start up n 5 00 V Vahl assistant it guides you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor set up assistant is used here as an example E
180. drive is installed a back mounting frame sizes RO R4 four holes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 three holes one of the bottom holes is located in the clamping plate 2 Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations 3 Position the drive onto the screws on the wall 4 Tighten the screws in the wall securely On DIN rail 1 Click the drive to the rail To detach the drive press the release lever on top of the drive 1b Mechanical installation 35 E Fasten clamping plates Note Make sure that you do not throw the clamping plates away as they are required for proper grounding of the power and control cables as well as the fieldbus option 1 Fasten the clamping plate A to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided screws 2 For frame sizes RO R2 fasten the I O clamping plate B to the clamping plate with the provided screws B Attach the optional fieldbus module Connect the power and control cables as instructed in chapter Electrical installation on page 47 4 Place the fieldbus module on the option ground plate C and tighten the grounding screw on the left corner of the fieldbus module This fastens the module to the option ground plate 5 If the terminal cover is not already removed push the recess in the cover and simultaneously slide the cover off the
181. drive power otherwise a fault will be generated and then remove the panel to be able to see the LEDs Technical data 357 Technical data What this chapter contains The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks 358 Technical data Ratings Type Input Output ACS355 in hN 480V bw 124 min 10 min bmax x E U A A A A A oxone 61 24 se 42 037 05 RO oxor na 47 71 62 ows 1 fi foroear2 161 67 tor 7 14 15 Ri xoa 168 75 ns 38 1 15 2 Re xose 210 96 7 172 22 3 Ra oscozas2 43 24 se 42 097 05 mo fosxosas2 61 35 ss 61 085 075 ro www TE p gt aro fee ors tf at ere na er er fr a oso e2 120 75 na o oosa tas se e we oscisas2 247 183 200 233 oscizas2 248 s 264 305 ossza at 244 388 427 Foscsio2 so i 465 548 O5 46A22 69 462 693 809 1 oaoa 6o so 33 so sa 4 oana 8 58 41 ee 72 te e mr osxosasa ss 81 56 84 98 22 3 At pose s6A0 4 ei 512 38 s ss 188 25 Ra osaava er ses 44 o 770 s20 o RA E EMC filter connected metal EMC filter screw installed 00353783 xls J U EMC filter disconnected plastic
182. e Description Def FbEq 2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency E 50 0 Hz FREQ U 60 0 Hz 0 0 600 0 Hz Maximum frequency 1 2013 MIN TORQUE Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive MIN SEL TORQUE IN TORQUE Value defined by parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 M 1 D Digital input DI1 O parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 1 D D D D o zE N value 1 parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 value D2 DS O D4 Db COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1 2 selection ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU 11 12 I3 l4 I5 communication profile on page 320 Minimum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and minimum torque limit 2 is defined by parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 value of parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 1 0 value of parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV E DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 2014 MAX TORQUE Selects the maximum torque limit for the drive MAX SEL TORQUE MAX TORQUE Value of parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Digital input DI1 O parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1
183. e displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT UNIT 3413 OUTPUT MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting oM 3414 OUTPUT2 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting EE 3415 SIGNAL3 Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel PARAM in the Output mode See parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 0 NOT Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 EH A pn SONAS MN ema 3413 See parameter SAT SIAM parameter 3415 See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 o PARAM setting 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by z parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN ERE MOMS NR PARAM setting 3418 OUTPUT3DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT P FOS amer oni SIGNATA ee Ses parameter 3404 OUTPUT DSPFORM 3419 OUTPUT3 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by aan RENE UNIT parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT UNIT 256 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3420 OUTPUTS MIN Sets the
184. e drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has adjustable limits for soeed current maximum torque maximum and DC voltage B Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS 148 Program features Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see chapter Technical data on page 357 Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic resets must be activated by the user B Settings Additional information Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings E Diagnostics Additional information AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level B Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1401 Supervision status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Supervision status through RO 2 4 With option
185. e is detected and the direction of rotation is forward the counter value increases by 1 When the direction of rotation is reverse the counter value decreases by 1 FILTERED DI5 Filtered digital input DI5 pulses When a pulse is detected the counter value increases by 1 Note Due to filtering the maximum input signal frequency is 50 Hz Counter reset through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DIS INV See selection D 1 INV E al o o o NOT SEL i DIA INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV NOT SEL Counter reset through digital input DI1 1 active O 1 inactive See selection DIT See selection DIT i lli 4 See selection DIT See selection DIT AT LIMIT Reset at the limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT STRT STP Counter reset at start stop command Source for the CMD start stop is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND S S CMD INV Counter reset at start stop command inverted ie counter is reset when start stop command is deactivated Start signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START Actual signals and parameters 213 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq RESET Reset enabled 1908 COUNTER Defines the value for the counter after reset RES VAL 0 65536 1909 COUNT Defines the divider for the pulse counter DIVIDER 0 Pulse counter divider N Every 2N bit
186. e off for a while The source for the fault reset signal is selected by 336 Fault tracing parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the fault history The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time the latest fault occurred The assistant control panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault logger mode on page 101 for more information Fault tracing 337 Alarm messages generated by the drive CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO OVERCURRENT Output current limit Check motor load 0308 bit 0 controller is active Check acceleration time 2202 and programmable fault 2205 function 1610 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 359 OVERVOLTAGE DC overvoltage Check deceleration time 2203 and 0308 bit 1 controller is active 2206 programmable fault Check input power line for static or function 1670 transient overvoltage 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE DC undervoltage Check input power supply 0308 bit 2 controller is active programmable fault function 1670 2004 D
187. e trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped The drive must be reset from the control panel or from a source selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred during the trial time defined by parameter 3102 Last fault is reset only if the number defined by parameter 3101 is 3 or more Trial time OOo t X Automatic reset X xXx Actual signals and parameters 247 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Number of the automatic resets 3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See 30 0 s parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS 10 6005 3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS If delay time is set to zero the drive resets immediately 0012008 Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE OVERCURRE overcurrent fault Automatically resets fault RT OVERCURRENT 0001 after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE mee D ENABLE 3105 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE eli intermediate link overvoltage fault Automatically resets fault DC OVERVOLT 0002 after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE 3106 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE UNDERVOLIA intermediate link undervoltage fault Automatically resets GE fa
188. ect input power and ENABLE motor cable connection is detected ie the input power cable is connected to the motor connection of the drive Note Disabling wiring fault ground fault may void the warranty i 3025 STO Selects how the drive reacts when the drive detects that the ONLY STO Safe torque off function is active ALARM ONLY FAULT The drive trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF 0044 1 ALARM amp FAUL The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF 2035 T when stopped and trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF 0044 when running NO amp FAULT The drive gives no indication to the user when stopped and 3 trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF 0044 when running ONLY ALARM The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF 2035 Note The start signal must be reset toggled to 0 if STO Safe torque off has been used while the drive has been running 3026 POWER FAIL Selects how the drive reacts when the control board is START externally powered by the MPOW 01 option module see Appendix Extension modules on page 393 and start is requested by the user ALARM The drive generates alaam UNDERVOLTAGE 20093 FAULT The drive trips on fault DC UNDERVOLT 0006 The drive gives no indication to the user w pol gt A no r D JJ S 3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL TIME If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number within th
189. ecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload iuo sudes de ee gery ee htt ee dds CIO dC ACER o aan RR Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload Protecting the motor against thermal overload 00 ccc eee eens Implementing the Safe torque off STO function liliis Using residual current devices RCD with the drive liliis Using a safety switch between the drive and the motor 0 00 cece eee eens Implementing a bypass connection o ooooooccocoo rre Protecting the contacts of relay outputs o oooconrcrcrinc dera n 6 Electrical installation What this chapter contains rias canna en Adame eons a oic we a Rt RR OR RR BR Checking the insulation of the assembly 0 0000 cece eee by cora Ea Iit DOWeF cables 2k eic boards rider Motor and motor cable x2 exec RR Xu RR LOEO RIED RI CEDERE XR E RE EE EE Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems GConnscung the power cables 92 9a ici rior da eaaa a a N RP UR ERE deb Gorinecom diagralri 2c00206 o3 035 PI REPE RACE P eee eee ee ee eee eee eee Connection procedure 2 o dr peewee aio Connecing the control cables eaa d
190. ection X2 Da or Embedded FBMA adapter fieldbus Control panel connected to X3 Modbus a Fieldbus adapter Fieldbus PC tool connection X3 _ adapter Kd A i P Standard l O Potentiometer With SREA 01 Ethernet adapter module it is possible to use Modbus TCP IP with the Ethernet For more information see SREA 01 Ethernet adapter module user s manual 3AUA0000042896 English B Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control LOC indicates local control on the panel display Assistant control panel Basic control panel uv 4 1 9 1 0 5 A 0 7 DIR 00 00 MENU The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control 126 Program features B External control When the drive is in external remote control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display Assistant control panel Basic control panel The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT 1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 2 ms time level B Settings Panel key Additional information
191. ed B Settings Parameter 9910 ID RUN 136 Program features Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed HM a XT TT NI O np power Tm fou Ube N m Hz Vdc Upc 160 80 520 120 60 390 f 80 40 260 TM 40 20 130 0 0 0 t s 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fj Output frequency of the drive Ty Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fut 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy B Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL DC magnetizing When DC magnetizing is activated the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible break away torque up to 18096 of the motor nominal torque By adjusting the premagnetizing time it is possible to synchronize the motor st
192. ee the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 1201 CONST Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation DI3 4 No constant speed in use O0 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI2 1 active O inactive D 4 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI3 1 active O inactive 2 3 5 12 I3 14 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI4 1 active 0 inactive DI5 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through digital input DI5 1 active O inactive Actual signals and parameters 193 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 Dl active O DI inactive DA DI2 Operation 5 1 0 0 Noconsantspoed 1 0 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 N 1 I alla la tl de
193. ef FbEq 2303 DERIVATION Defines the derivation time for the speed controller 0 ms TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Error value I e Error value Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples 0 70000 ms 230 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2304 ACC Defines the derivation time for acceleration deceleration COMPENSATI compensation In order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 2303 DERIVATION TIME Note As a general rule set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine The speed controller Autotune run does this automatically see parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN The figure below shows the speed
194. election D 7 2 10 DI1 INV User parameter set control through inverted digital input 1 DI1 Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 User parameter set 2 is loaded into use Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 User parameter set 1 is loaded into use DI2 INV See selection DI 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV i 206 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DIA INV See selection D 1 INV DI1 2 INV User parameter set selection through inverted digital inputs 7 DI1 and DI2 1 Dl inactive O DI active User parameter set User parameter set 1 User parameter set 2 User parameter set 3 DI2 3 INV See selection D 1 2 DI3 4 INV See selection D 1 2 DI4 5 INV See selection D 7 2 1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source NOT SEL for the local control mode lock signal When local lock is active entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel NOT SEL Local control is allowed DI1 Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1 Rising edge of digital input DI1 Local control disabled Falling edge of digital input DI1 Local control allowed See selection DIT See selection DIT See selection DIT 5 i See selection D 7 Local control is disabled Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14 The control word is sent by
195. elects the type of the reference in local control mode REF1 Hz rpm Frequency reference in rpm Frequency reference Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ REFIT 1102 EXT1 EXT2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal EXT1 SEL that selects between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 3m um mM ene y jo 188 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description EXT 1 EXT1 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1 SELECT Digital input DI1 0 EXT1 1 EXT2 DI1 5 DI See selection DIT EXT2 EXT2 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2 SELECT Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1 EXT2 selection ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 320 and ABB drives communication profile on page 315 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed EXT1 EXT2 control selection Timed function 1 active EXT2 timed function 1 inactive EXT1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNO 2 TIMED FUNC 3 TIMED FUNC 4 NV o5 MED FUNO 2 MED FUNC3 MED FUNG 4 Q B m o m Z lt NY
196. en by the permanent magnet motor has high inertia Disabed JO AO NN slow ramp times are recommended can be used for permanent magnet motors only accurate torque control is not possible in the current vector rotation mode Can be used for permanent magnet motors only 10 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal current 2622 SMOOTH Current used in the current vector rotation at low speeds 50 START CUR Increase the smooth start current if the application requires high pull up torque Decrease the smooth start current if motor shaft swinging needs to be minimized Note that 2623 SMOOTH Output frequency up to which the current vector rotation is 10 START FRQ used Can be used for permanent magnet motors only 2 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal frequency 2901 COOLING FAN Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time 0 0 kh G counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING FAN ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 0 1 kh disabled 2902 COOLING FAN Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter 0 0 kh ACT When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 0 1 kh 2903 REVOLUTION De
197. en when the input power of the drive is switched off Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive See page 48 Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible without an external filter Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged See page 48 Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible without an external filter All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding ie within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding Note Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and BRK and BRK Safety 19 Permanent magnet motor drives These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the eq
198. entering the first task Language select automatically The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start up assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all See section Assistants mode on page 98 for how to start the Start up assistant or other assistants 122 Program features B Default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Application selection Default tasks ABB STANDARD Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals 3 WIHE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals ALTERNATE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals MOTOR POT Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals HAND AUTO Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT
199. er The power ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Py If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F for low Note 3 It is important to check that in Common DC systems the power flowing through the common DC connection does not exceed Py B Derating hy The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft or the switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8 12 or 16 kHz Temperature derating hy In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current low is decreased by 1 for every additional 1 C 1 8 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 hy 360 Technical data Altitude derating by In altitudes 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 196 for every 100 m 330 ft For 3 phase 200 V drives the maximum altitude is 3000 m 9800 ft above sea level In altitudes 2000 3000 m 660
200. er as holding registers 0 event counters cleared If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode no response is returned If the port is not currently in Listen Only Mode a normal response is returned before the restart 04 Force Listen Only Mode Forces the addressed slave device to Listen Only Mode This isolates it from the other devices on the network allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device No response is returned The only function that will be processed after this mode is entered is the Restart Communications Option function subcode 01 Writes to the registers 1 to approximately 120 registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Read Write Performs a combination of one read operation and one write Multiple operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus Holding transaction The write operation is performed before the read Write Multiple Holding Registers 3 03 6 06 Diagnostics 8 08 Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between the master and the slave devices or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave The following subcodes are supported 00 Return Query Data The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response The entire response message should be identical to the request 01 Restart Communications Option The sla
201. er disconnecting the input power Checking the insulation of the assembly B Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests for example hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically B Input power cable Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive 48 Electrical installation B Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems WARNING Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installin
202. erated to 50 Hz with 5 s ramp time State 4 is active for 200 s and after that the state shifts back to state 3 Parameter Seting Addiionalinformati n 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422 8452 8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE ALWAYS Sequence programming enabled 8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input DI1 8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1 INV Sequence programming reset ie reset to state 1 when DI1 signal is lost 1 gt 0 170 Program features information 8420 ST1 REF 100 8430 40 8440 50 8450 100 State SEL reference 8421 ST1 START 8431 START 8441 START 8451 START Run direction COMMANDS REV FRW FRW FRW and stop command 8422 ST1 S 8432 60 s 8442 5s 8452 5s Ramp time RAMP 10 8424 ST1 40s 8434 120 s 8444 8454 200 s State change CHANGE DLY delay 8425 ST1 TRIG CHANGE 8435 CHANGE 8445 DI2 8455 TO ST2 DLY DLY 8426 ST1 TRIG NOT SEL 8436 NOT SEL 8446 NOT SEL 8456 CHANGE State change TOSTN DLY trigger 8427 ST1 8437 8447 8457 STATE 3 STATE N E Example 2 ST2 error acceleration ST1 ST2 STA ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 tooslow ST8 AU 15 t Jus ga ons 6 ea eo dos ja a A ST3 ST3 Sis All 10 f4 f4 f4 4 A Sos sgm A sas seJ ec ee P ae Al1 10 t f SE a gee A Y ERROR ST5 ST5 ST5 Al 595 e de unnm REGN n A ru Meche oey Seq start Error Drive is programme
203. erates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and the drive can be improved by 196 to 1096 depending on the load torque and speed B Settings Parameter 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available It is possible to adjust the acceleration deceleration times and Linea Motor speed the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled through a digital input or fieldbus The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S curve Linear shape is suitable for drives requiring t s steady or slow acceleration deceleration S curve shape is ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed B Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Sequence programming offers eight additional ramp times See section Sequence programming on page 166 140 Program features Critical speeds Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed bands because of eg mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical speeds or speed bands B Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed re
204. erence interact to produce the reference REF1 REF2 Direction determined by Direction determined by digital the sign of COMM command eg digital input control panel Par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 l REF1 2 FORWARD Max ref Max ref Fieldbus i Fieldbus ref 1 2 100 ref 1 2 163 163 Max ref Max ref Par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 REF 1 2 REVERSE Max ref 163 3 Fieldbus Fieldbus 100 ref 1 2 ref 1 2 Max ref Par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 Direction REQUEST command Max ref Max ref FORWARD 163 i Fieldbus 100 Fieldbus ref 1 2 f 100 ref 1 2 100 163 163 E Max ref E Max ref Direction command REVERSE B Actual value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the selected function See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 175 312 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Modbus mapping The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive Code Additional information hex dec Read Multiple Reads the contents of registers in a slave device Holding Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped Registers as holding registers Write Single Writes to a single register in a slave device Holding Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped 0 0 Regist
205. ernal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when user set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 119 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL Copy user set 2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Copy user set 3 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET3 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 105 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Note that the drive has to be in local control for uploading and downloading Sep Aim NON Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC OMAIN MENU Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly until WWW you get to the Main menu If REM is shown on the status line press first to switch to local control CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys A and SY 2 and pressing ENTE To copy all parameters including user sets and LOC OPAR BACKUP internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par backup menu with keys A and SY 7 and press M During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press EP if you
206. ery respect comply with the provisions of the directive For more information see the Declaration of Incorporation by ABB Drives Patent protection in the USA Technical data 377 This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 654 624 6 175 256 6 313 599 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 972 976 7 034 510 7 084 604 7 215 099 7 274 573 7 372 696 7 915 447 D512 026 D548 183S Other patents pending 5 301 085 5 799 805 6 184 740 6 316 896 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 977 449 7 036 223 7 098 623 7 221 152 7 279 802 7 388 765 7 560 894 D512 696 D573 090S 5 463 302 5 940 286 6 195 274 6 335 607 6 600 290 6 940 253 6 984 958 7 045 987 7 102 325 7 227 325 7 280 938 7 408 791 D503 931 D521 466 5 521 483 5 942 874 6 229 356 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 934 169 6 985 371 7 057 908 7 109 780 7 245 197 7 330 095 7 417 408 D510 319 D541 743S 5 532 568 5 952 613 6 252 436 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 956 352 6 992 908 7 059 390 7 164 562 7 250 739 7 349 814 7 446 268 D510 320 D541 744S 5 589 754 6 094 364 6 265 724 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 958 923 6 999 329 7 067 997 7 176 779 7 262 577 7 352 220 7 456 615 D511 137 D541 745S 5 612 604 6 147 887 6 305 464 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 967 453 7 023 160 7 082 374 7 190 599 7 271 505 7 365 622 7 508 688 D511 150 D548 182S 378 Technical data Dimension drawings 379 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings of
207. es add 26 mm 1 02 in to the depth measure 3 pol ay A e n e iS SP t lo 9098 le 6 00 1 Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000067782 A Dimension drawings 383 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 1 Extension modules add 26 mm 1 02 in to the depth measure 3AUA0000067783 A 384 Dimension drawings Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 5 mm DIN rail 3 1 Extension modules add 26 mm 1 02 in to the depth measure Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000067786 A Dimension drawings 385 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 6 99 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 1 Extension modules add 26 mm 1 02 in to the depth measure 3AUA0000067787 A 386 Dimension drawings Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 5 mm 9 21 a
208. estart 0 0 NOT SEL Delay time If parameter value is set to zero Zero speed 1 0 1s 0 0 60 0 s CE function is disabled 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SEL that selects between the two ramp pairs acceleration deceleration pair 1 and 2 Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 Ramp pale 2 E defined by parameters 2205 2207 NOTSEL Ramppartisued ooy DN Digital input DI1 1 ramp pair 2 0 ramp pair 1 M Dg SessedonDi B 224 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1 2 selection 7 ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 320 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile Sequence programming ramp defined by parameter 8422 ST1 RAMP or 8423 8492 NV DI2 DI3 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s TIME 1 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ in scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED in vector control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE If the speed reference
209. eters Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 2205 and 2206 Safe torque off connections X1C STO not 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp shown in the diagram are jumpered by default Application macros 119 User macros In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to create three user macros The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user macro but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1 The procedure for the other two macros is identical only the parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO values are different To create User macro 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the application but it is not done yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU SAVE ENTER A e Press wi assistant control panel or RW basic control panel to save To recall User macro 1 Change parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU Press bw assistant control panel or lt basic control panel to load The user ma
210. ettings by following the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 61 B How to start up the drive without a control panel Apply input power and wait for a moment Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Start up control with O and ID run 61 B How to perform a manual start up For the manual start up you can use the basic control panel or the assistant control panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the basic control panel displays unless the instruction applies to the assistant control panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The basic control panel powers up into the Output mode The assistant control panel asks if you want to run the Start up assistant If you press Ez the Start up assistant is not run and you can continue with assistant manual start up in a similar manner as described 0 below for the basic control panel EXIT 100 00 OK O If you have an assistant control panel select the REM OPAR EDIT language the basic control panel does not 9901 LANGUAGE support languages See parameter 9901 for the ENGLI SH values of the available language alternatives 0 For instructions on how to set parameters with the CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE assistant control panel see section Assistant control panel on page 87 Select the
211. f motor Dynamic lt 196 s with lt 196 s with accuracy 100 torque 100 torque step step NactMret EJ Area lt 196 s MN TN rated motor torque Ny rated motor speed lac actual speed Torque control performance figures The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control 5 with 5 with nominal nominal torque 20 at the Torque step lt 10mswith lt 10 ms with rise time nominal nominal torque torque Tn rated motor torque Tres torque reference 144 Program features Scalar control It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of vector control In the scalar control mode the drive is controlled with a frequency reference It is recommended to activate the scalar control mode in the following special applications In multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification e If the nominal current of the motor is less than 20 of the nominal output current of the drive When the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected The scalar control mode is not recommended for permanent magnet motors In the scalar control mode some standard features are not available B Settings
212. f the Control word in hexadecimal Status word Status word Supported only by the ABB drives profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 format 0005 Actual 1 8 Actual value 1 8 Use parameter 5310 5377 to select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40012 40005 40012 40032 Control word MSW R W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control word Supported only by the DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40033 Status word LSW 0303 FB STS WORD 1 ie the least significant word of Supported only by the DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE Supported only by the DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40031 Control word LSW R W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 ie the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control word Supported only by the DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE B the DCU profile 32 bit Status word 40034 ACS355 Status 0304 FB STS WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status word Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile ie modified values are not automatically stored to the permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all changed values 314 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus B Function codes Supported functi
213. f the STO function before commissioning Technical data STO components STO safety relay type General requirements IEC 61508 and or EN ISO 13849 1 Output requirements Maximum switching delay 200 ms between contacts Example 1 Simple SILS approved safey relay CS Exampe2 Programmable safey oge SSS STO connection Input for external STO 24 V DC 10 load 25 mA supply Input impedance Rin 2 kohm 12 mA channel Maximum load 200 mA depending on l O load STO cable 2x2 cables low voltage single shielded twisted pair cable 1 5 0 25 mm 16 24 AWG Maximum length Max 25 m between STO inputs and the operating contact Tightening torque 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in 404 Appendix Safe torque off STO Data related to safety standards IEC 61508 EN ISO 13849 1 IEC 62061 Poe ug 6 48 FIT sr pa B Abbreviations Abbreviation Reference Description Fr aene SSCS MTTFd EN ISO 13849 1 Mean Time To dangerous Failure The total number of life units the number of dangerous undetected failures during a particular measurement interval under stated conditions Maintenance Test the operation and reaction of the STO function every year Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and ser
214. ference Constant speed selections are ignored if torque control is active or PID reference is being followed or drive is in local control mode This function operates on a 2 ms time level B Settings Additional information Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS _ Constant speed settings 1207 Constant speed 6 Used also for jogging function See section Jogging on page 161 1208 Constant speed 7 Used also for fault functions see group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS and for jogging function see section Jogging on page 161 Program features 141 Custom U f ratio The user can define a U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency This custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U f ratio are not sufficient eg when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Voltage V Custom U f ratio Par 2618 Par 2616 Par 2614 Par 2612 Par 2610 gt f Hz Par 2611 Par 2613 Par 2615 Par 2617 Par 9907 Note The U f curve can be used in scalar control only ie when 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Note The voltage and the frequency points of the U f curve must fulfill the following requirements 2610 lt 2612 lt 2614 lt 2616 lt 2618 and 2611 lt 2613 lt 2615 lt 2617 lt 9907 WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor damage overheating B Settings Additional in
215. fines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter 0 Mrev G Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT value 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is disabled Mrev 238 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter ACT When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions Parameter is reset by setting it to 1 zero 1 Mrev 2905 RUN TIME Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter Value 0 0 kh 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 2 0 1 kh A iet soa menar 2906 RUN TIME Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter 0 0 kh ACT When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 2 0 1 kh 2907 USER MWh Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption 0 0 MWh TRIG counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh ACT value 0 0 Megawatt hours If par
216. formation 2605 Custom U f ratio activation 2610 2618 Custom U f ratio settings E Diagnostics Faut Additional information PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect U f ratio 142 Program features Speed controller tuning It is possible to manually adjust the controller gain integration time and derivation time or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN In Autotune run the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step typically 1 to 20 A Undercompensated B Normally tuned autotuning C Normally tuned manually Better dynamic performance than with B The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller The controller output is the reference for the torque controller Derivative acceleration Proportional integral Speed reference reference Derivative Calculated actual speed Note The speed controller can be used in vector control ie when 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is VECTOR SPEED or VECTOR TORQ B Settings Parameter groups 28 SPEED CONTROL and 20 LIMITS Program features 143 E Diagnostics Actual signal 0102 SPEED Speed control performance figures The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control Toad Speed No pulse With pulse mee Static 20 of motor 2 o
217. frame Snap the fieldbus module attached to the option ground plate in position so that the module is plugged to the connection on the drive front and the screw holes in the option ground plate and the I O clamping plate are aligned Fasten the option ground plate to the I O clamping plate with the provided screws D 90 N Slide the terminal cover back in place 36 Mechanical installation Planning the electrical installation 37 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the compatibility of the motor and drive and selecting cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Implementing the AC power line connection See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 367 Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means Insta
218. ft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running eg because start enable is Panel operation Name of the current mode mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state eg PAR EDIT Reference value or Reference value in the Output mode number of the Number of the highlighted item eg selected item mode parameter group or fault E Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the lt a and Y arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key 53 you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key 7 is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The assistant control panel has nine panel modes Output mode Parameter mode Assistants mode Changed parameters mode Fault logger mode Time and date mode Parameter backup mode I O settings mode and Fault mode The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to t
219. g the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible without an external filter 1 If you have an IT ungrounded or corner grounded TN system disconnect the Pd internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw For 3 phase U type drives with type designation ACS355 03U the EMC screw is already removed at the factory and replaced by a plastic one EMC screw in RO R2 In R3 the screw is a little further up O EX a 3 951 EMC screw in R4 IP20 behind cover in R4 NEMA 1 Electrical installation 49 Connecting the power cables E Connection diagram Drive OUTPUT Ba BRK For alternatives see section Selecting the supply disconnecting A device NS disconnecting F A means on page 37 L A resistor or Optional brake B Common DC 9 L r ho 1 Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board 2 Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable
220. gency L brake J L 230 VAC 158 Program features E Operation time scheme The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function See also section State shifts on page 159 1 4 Start command LIC External speed reference dur pom Inverter modulating f wy Motor magnetized A y ae Open brake command dA T ml LL RO DO Internal speed reference actual motor speed Nes output Torque mem Tmem E Ij Ts Brake open current torque parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or current torque from parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQUE MEM Imem Tmem Brake close current torque saved in parameter 0179 BRAKE TORQUE MEM tnd Motor magnetizing delay parameter 4305 BRAKE MAGN DELAY tod Brake open delay parameter 4301 BRAKE OPEN DLY Nes Brake close speed parameter 4303 BRAKE CLOSE LVL td Mechanical brake close delay Program features 159 State shifts From any state 1157 rising edge NO MODULATION 2 RFG Ramp function generator in the speed control loop reference handling State Symbol XIYIZ NN State name X Y Z State outputs operations X21 Open the brake The relay output set to brake on off control energizes Y 1 Forced start The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the status of the external Start signal Z 1 Ramp in zero Forces the used speed referen
221. ges of the reference processing chain Program features 129 Reference trimming In reference trimming the external reference is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX 2 DIRECT i PROPORTION AL REF1 Hz rpm 0 NOT SEL REF2 4232 CORR CTION SRC REF Hz rpm REF2 96 Drive reference before trimming REF Drive reference after trimming max speed par 2002 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater max freq par 2008 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater max torque par 2074 or 2013 if the absolute value is greater PID2 ref par 4210 PID2 act par 4214 4221 1 Note Torque reference trimming is only for external reference REF2 96 2 REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active See parameter 1102 3 When par 4232 PID2REF the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 1105 when REF 1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active When par 4232 PID2ZOUTPUT the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 2002 if parameter 9904 value is VECTOR SPEED or VECTOR TORQ and by parameter 2008 value if parameter 9904 value is SCALAR FREQ B Settings Additional information 1102 REF1 2 selection 4230 4232 Trimming function settings 4201 4229 PID control settings Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits 13
222. ghest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed insufficient braking torque or changes in load when using torque reference Operating range limits are set by parameters 2001 MINIMUM SPEED and 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED in vector control or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ in scalar control Internal configuration file error Fieldbus communication break Configuration file reading error Trip command received from fieldbus Motor circuit fault due to missing motor phase or motor thermistor relay used in motor temperature measurement fault Check minimum maximum frequency settings Check adequacy of motor braking torque Check applicability of torque control Check need for brake chopper and resistor s Contact your local ABB representative Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 301 chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 or appropriate fieldous adapter manual Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate Contact your local ABB representative See appropriate communication module manual Check motor and motor cable Check motor thermistor relay if used 348 Fault tracing 0035 0036 SW 0037 0044 0045 0046 FAULT OUTP WIRING FF95 0306 bit 15 programmable fault function 3023 INCOMPATIBLE 630F 030
223. he Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset itin the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 335 90 Control panels Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC v start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 Hz remote control modify the reference value and monitor up 0 A to three actual values 0 To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu The status line see section Status line on page 89 shows the name of the current menu mode item or state C HA N GE D p A R EXIT 100 00 ENTER How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Fast oe Page Howioseedihemontoredsgnds Parmeers 96 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 100 parameters How to view faults Fault logger How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and date clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter backup How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter backup How to view backup i
224. he fan is switched off 1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a 0 Hz PPP MIU aro input See sion Freuen nto page 103 1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 Hz PHP MOS NPT Frequent Se secon rue nputon pe 192 1803 eem FREQ Defines the filter time constant for frequency input ie the time within which 6396 of a step change is reached See section Frequency input on page 133 0 See section Transistor output on page 134 DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO Jo FREQUENCY Bee parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 00s 1807 DO OFF Defines the release delay for digital output DO f DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104 SEL FO X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 210 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1809 FO CONTENT Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows 1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO content content X X Setting range depends on parameter 7808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1810 FO CONTENT Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO
225. he signal SE resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Reset through digital input DI1 reset on the rising edge of 1 DI1 or from the control panel A A 0B ses selection DI 04 es selection SSCS 06 See selection DI START STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input or from the control panel Note Do not use this option when start stop and direction commands are received through fieldbus communication COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal e control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 320 and ABB drives communication profile on page 315 DI1 INV Reset through inverted digital input DI1 reset on the falling 1 edge of DI1 or from the control panel amm See selection DN DINNV See selection DN MUN See selection Dav DINNV See selection Draw i lli Actual signals and parameters 205 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1605 USER PAR Enables the change of the User parameter set through a NOT SEL SET CHG digital input See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped
226. hen value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Value of supervised parameter HI par 3203 LO par 3202 Case A Energized 1 1 0 t Case B Energized 1 a C 0 t Actual signals and parameters 249 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Example 2 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO gt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO making it the active limit The new limit remains active until the supervised signal drops below the lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI making it the active limit Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal exceeds the active limit Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay is de energized whenever the supervised signal drops below the active limit Value of supervised parameter Active limit X HI par 3203 LO par 3202 Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 L E C 0 t Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 0 not selected 3202 dl LIM Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3201 SUPE
227. i H1 amp DI5 State change when Al1 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 55 value and when DI5 is active Al2 H2 amp DI5 State change when AI2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH 56 value and when DI5 is active Ali L1 amp DI4 State change when Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 57 value and when DIA is active AI2L2 amp DIA State change when AI2 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 58 value and when DIA is active Ali H1 amp DI4 State change when Al1 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH 59 value and when DI4 is active Al2 H2 amp DI4 State change when AI2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and when DI4 is active DLY AND Dl1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 61 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI1 is active DLY AND DI2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 62 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI2 is active DLY AND DIS State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 63 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI3 is active DLY AND DI4 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 64 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI4 is active DLY AND DI5 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 65 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and DI5 is active DLY amp AI2 H2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed and AI2 value par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value DLY amp AI2 L2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE
228. ible causes and remedies 3 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 335 Bit 0 2 Reserved Bit 3 INCOMPATIBLE SW Bit 4 SAFE TORQUE OFF Bit 7 OVERSPEED Bit 15 PAR PCU 1 PAR PCU 2 PAR HZRPM PAR AI SCALE PAR AO SCALE PAR FBUSMISS PAR CUSTOM U F 0308 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 1 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 299 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 2 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 2 OVERVOLTAGE Actual signals and parameters 183 Actual signals No Name Value Description Bit 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Bit 3 DIR LOCK Bit 4 IO COMM Bit 5 Al1 LOSS Bit 6 Al2 LOSS Bit 7 PANEL LOSS Bit 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP Bit 9 MOTOR TEMP Bit 10 UNDERLOAD Bit 11 MOTOR STALL Bit 12 AUTORESET 15 Reserved 0309 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 2 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 335 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 Reserved Bit 1 PID SLEEP Bit 2 ID RUN Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 START ENABLE 1 MISSING Bit 5 START ENABLE 2 MISSING Bit 6 EMERGENCY STOP Bit 7 ENCODER ERROR Bit 8 FIRST START Bit 9 INPUT PHASE LOSS i 11 Reserved Bit 12 MOTOR BACK EMF Bit 13 SAFE TORQUE OFF Bit 14 15 Reserved UJ oo Bit 10 0401 LAST FA
229. imum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed value FREQ VECTOR Sensorless vector control mode 1 SPEED Reference 1 speed reference in rpm Reference 2 speed reference in percent 100 is the absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed value Actual signals and parameters 297 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage For asynchronous 200 V VOLT motors must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate units For permanent magnet motors the nominal voltage is the 230 V back emf voltage at nominal speed 400 V If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm eg 60 V per E units 1000 rpm the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal speed is 400 V 3 60 V 180 V 400 V The drive cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater U units than the input power voltage 460 V Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal motor voltage but increased linearly up to the value of the input voltage Output voltage Input voltage 9905 Output frequency 9907 in WARNING Never connect a motor to a drive which is connected to power line with voltage level higher than the rated motor voltage 200 V units Volt
230. ing Check STO circuit cabling and opening of contacts in STO circuit Check STO circuit cabling and opening of contacts in STO circuit Fault tracing 349 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0101 SERF CORRUPT FF55 0307 bit 14 0103 SERF MACRO FF55 0307 bit 14 0201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD u 6100 Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact 0307 bit 13 your local ABB representative 0202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100 0307 bit 12 0206 CBID ERROR 5000 0307 bit 11 1000 PAR HZRPM Incorrect Check parameter settings Check that 6320 speed frequency limit following applies parameter setting 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0307 bit 15 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ lt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are within range 1003 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect analog input Check parameter group 13 ANALOG 6320 Al signal scaling INPUTS settings Check that following applies pore el TO 1301 MINIMUM Al1 lt 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 lt 1305 MAXIMUM AlZ2 350 Fault tracing CODE FAULT 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320 0307 bit 15 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320 0307 bit 15 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320 0307 bit 15 1007 PAR FBUSMISS 63
231. ing 2 EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press tz repeatedly until you get there Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display means forward and 5 reverse Press to stop the motor reverse direction direction To change the direction of the motor rotation Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from O NO to l g1 PHASE INVERSION 1 YES or vice versa e Verify your work by applying input power and 1 repeating the check as described above 21S IL SIME After the whole set up is completed check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink 68 Start up control with I O and ID run How to control the drive through the I O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the basic control panel are shown as an example If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired See section Default I O according to the connection diagram given for the connection diagram on page 54 ABB standard macro Ensure
232. ing analog input Al1 as shown in the following examples for the ABB drives profile Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM COMM MAX MIN MIN COMM MAX MIN MIN Al1 Al 50 MAX MIN Al 50 MAX MIN Corrected reference rpm Max limit mn Min limit Min limit Max limit Corrected reference rpm Corrected reference rpm COMM REF 96 Max limit EUR Min limit Min limit Max limit CO REF 9 Corrected reference rpm Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 309 Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM COMM Al 50 MAX MIN COMM Al 50 MAX MIN AI MIN MIN Corrected reference rpm ceu Max limit REF 76 Min limit Min limit Max limit gg Corrected reference rpm Corrected reference rpm COMM REF Ma x limit Min limit Min limit Max limit COMM REF Corrected reference rpm Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN 310 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus B Fieldbus reference scaling Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the ABB
233. ing the timed start stop control for 1001 1002 external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control 1102 Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 Selecting timed function status indicated 1401 1403 1410 through relay output RO1 or if MREL 01 relay output extension module is in use RO2 RO4 Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up assistant Main displays and information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main display Information display REM UPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 220 V CANCEL 100 00 SAVE 1 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued Local control vs external control Program features 125 The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus or an optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with the DriveWindow Light 2 PC tool can also control the drive Local control Drive External control f Panel b e Panel ec connection X2 Cim conn
234. input 3 Current P e nomina curent A Normal B Inversion ACT1 minimum gt ACT1 maximum ACT1 ACT1 Source min Sou ce max Source min Source max Source signal Source signal 1000 1000 Value in percent 4019 ACT1 Defines the maximum value for variable ACT1 if an analog MAXIMUM input is selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT The minimum 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 Value in percent 4020 ACT2 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 MINIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4018 4021 ACT2 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4019 4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL SELECTION activation input See section Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control on page 153 NOT SEL No sleep function selected O0 268 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description The function is activated deactivated through digital input DI1 1 activation 0 deactivation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effec
235. input Al1 T301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Torque control Selecting the source for the torque 1106 reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down 2401 2402 times PID control Selecting the source for the process 1106 reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed frequency limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the source and limits for the 4016 4018 4019 process actual value 124 Program features Name Descipion Setparameters Start Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop 1001 1002 signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 Defining the direction control 1003 Defining the start and stop modes 2101 2103 Selecting the use of Run enable signal 1601 Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through Group 14 RELAY relay output RO1 and if MREL 01 relay OUTPUTS output extension module is in use RO2 RO4 Selecting the signals indicated through Group 15 ANALOG analog output AO OUTPUTS Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Timed functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Select
236. ion alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3010 STALL FUNCTION 3011 STALL FREQUENCY and 3012 STALL TIME E Motor thermal protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor thermal protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the drive Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted if the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C 146 Program features Motor load f 100 Output current relative to motor nominal current 199 Break point t Motor load curve Temp P 3007 100 3 rise 127 100 P 3008 50 63 Zero speed load Motor thermal time constant P 3009 Settings Parameters 3005 3009 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 155 E Underload protection Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction The drive provides an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault condition Supervision limits underload curve and underload time can be specified as
237. ion See section OFF O CA 2601 FLUX OPT Activates deactivates the flux optimization function Flux OFF ENABLE optimization reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and the drive can be improved by 1 to 10 depending on the load torque and speed The disadvantage of this function is that the o Actual signals and parameters 233 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2603 IR COMP Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed IR VOLT compensation The function is useful in applications with a dependent high break away torque when vector control cannot be applied To prevent overheating set IR compensation voltage as low as possible Note The function can be used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ The figure below illustrates the IR compensation Typical IR compensation values 200 240 V units 200 240 V unis 380 480 V unts 380 480 V units Motor voltage A IR compensated B No compensation 2604 IR COMP Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V 80 FREQ See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Note If parameter 2605 U F RATIO is set to USER DEFINED this parameter is not active The IR compensation frequency is set by parameter 2610 USER DEFINED U1 FOS UF RATIO the voltage to frequency U f ratio below the field wea
238. is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 With the internal EMC filter motor cable length 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency For the maximum motor cable length with an optional external EMC filter see page 368 WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Technical data 375 Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected ona corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive UL marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements B UL checklist Input power connection See section Electric power network specification on page 367 Disconnecting device disconnecting means See Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means on page 37 Ambient conditions The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 371 for specific limits Input cable fuses For installation in
239. is not decelerating AT SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value ie is within tolerance limits Drive has not reached setpoint LIMIT Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits All supervised parameters are within limits 0 REV REF Drive reference is in reverse direction Drive reference is in forward direction REV ACT Drive is running in reverse direction O Drive is running in forward direction Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 323 DCU profile Status word parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode o Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked Direction lock is OFF 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked Local mode lock is OFF Drive is in vector control mode Drive is in scalar control mode 1 Jogging function is active ogging function is not active Control word requested from fieldbus No operation Reference 1 requested from fieldbus Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus Reference 2 requested from fieldbus Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus External PID reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus No start inhibit from fieldbus 324 Fieldbus control with embedded fie
240. is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS355 Main circuit Control circuit x E U Rated y and on Min Max Ww Ww W m h ft min Lomo e zr oos s 105 275 a _ owe to 61 zr osoase o er 27 oxor 0 os 294 a 260 zy sa ss 9 s sa S58 o Technical data 365 Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS355 Main circuit Control circuit x E U Rated y and on Min Max W m h ft min 7 ee 244 f ooma 21 98 287 o 5 oons 31 98 28 19 e osi a 98 287 195 e oxo 8i 98 8 19 266 350 3844 sse 99 s gt o sa sse S5 mo 334 sse 9 s 00353783 xls J B Noise Frame Noise level size dBA RO 30 00353783 xls J 366 Technical data Terminal and lead through data for the power cables Frame Max cable U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 PE size diameter for NEMA 1 BRK and BRK U1 V1 W1 BRK and Terminal size Tightening Clamp size Tightening U2 V2 W2 BRK torque torque in in mm AWG Nm lbfin mm AWG Nm Ibf in PRO 16 oss 1 oea 060 10 os 7 9 i2 1 Ri 16 oss i6 063 4060 to o8 7 25 3 2 9 R2 16 oss 16 o6s 4060 10 o8 7 75 3 2 m ms 114 16 oes 10060 6 iz 15 25 3 ian 00353783 xls J Terminal and lead through data for the control cables Cond
241. ised signal selected LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit xx Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected HI by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit MENA al range MA on oe 3207 setting ECC 3301 FIRMWARE es the version of the firmware Ta REN Els REN hex 3302 LOADING Displays the version of the loading package type EA unn everett nne mente hex 2202 hex ACS355 0nU E Date value in format YY WW year week Ld 3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings 0000 hex 0000 FFFF Value in format XXXY hex hex XXX Nominal current of the drive in amperes An A indicates decimal point For example if XXX is 9A8 nominal current is 9 8 A Y Nominal voltage of the drive 1 1 phase 200 240 V 2 3 phase 200 240 V 4 3 phase 380 480 V 3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the TABLE drive Actual signals and parameters 251 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0000 FFFF Eg 400E hex hex 3401 SIGNAL1 Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel PARAM in the Output mode Assistant control panel 3404 3405 y 1 1 0 3 DR 100 00 MENU 0 NOT Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 cum 0102 SPEED
242. istor braking 389 Appendix Resistor braking What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to select the brake resistor and cables protect the system connect the brake resistor and enable resistor braking Planning the braking system B Selecting the brake resistor ACS355 drives have an internal brake chopper as standard equipment The brake resistor is selected using the table and equations presented in this section 1 Determine the required maximum braking power Prmax for the application Prmax must be smaller than Permax given in the table on page 390 for the used drive type 2 Calculate resistance R with Equation 1 3 Calculate energy Erpulse with Equation 2 4 Select the resistor so that the following conditions are met e The rated power of the resistor must be greater than or equal to Prmax e Resistance R must be between Rmin and Rmax given in the table for the used drive type The resistor must be able to dissipate energy Epoulse during the braking cycle T 390 Appendix Resistor braking Equations for selecting the resistor 150000 ton Eq 1 Un 200 240 V R Panax PRmax PR Uy 380 415 V R LLO __ mE is Rmax T lt gt 615000 Un 415 480 V R 75 Rmax Eq 2 Erpulse PRmax fon t Eq 3 PRave PRmax a For conversion use 1 hp 746 W where R selected brake resistor value ohm PRmax maximum power during the braking cycle W PRave average power duri
243. ive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of drive memory error Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of CRC error Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of data processing error Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of parameter error Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible 344 Fault tracing Fault messages generated by the drive 0001 0002 0003 0004 0006 0007 0008 FAULT OVERCURRENT 2310 0305 bit 0 DC OVERVOLT 3210 0305 bit 1 DEV OVERTEMP 4210 0305 bit 2 SHORT CIRC 2340 0305 bit 3 DC UNDERVOLT 3220 0305 bit 5 Al LOSS 8110 0305 bit 6 programmable fault function 3001 3021 AI2 LOSS 8110 0305 bit 7 programmable fault function 3001 3022 CAUSE WHAT TO DO Output current has exceeded trip level Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Fault trip limit is 135 C Short circuit in motor cable
244. ive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted where necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION 1001 EXT1 COMM Selects the fieldbus as the source for the start COMMANDS and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location 1002 EXT2 COMM Selects the fieldbus as the source for the start COMMANDS and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active control location 1003 DIRECTION FORWARD Enables the rotation direction control as defined REVERSE by parameters 7007 and 1002 The direction REQUEST control is explained in section Reference handling on page 311 1010 JOGGING SEL COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation through the fieldbus 1102 EXT1 EXT2 COMM Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection through the SEL fieldbus 1103 REF1 SELECT COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is COMM Al1 selected as the active control location See COMM AIt section Reference selection and correction on page 332 1106 REF2 SELECT COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is COMM AI1 selected as the active control location See COMM AIt section Reference selection and correction on page 332 1401 RELAY COMM Enable
245. kening point For scalar control ony LEAR linear rato for constant torque applcatons M SQUARED Sonn ratio for centrifugal pump and fan DNR With squared U f ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies Not recommended for permanent magnet motors USER Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610 2618 See 3 DEFINED section Custom U ratio on page 141 234 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2606 SWITCHING _ Defines the switching frequency of the drive Higher 4 kHz FREQ switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise In multimotor systems do not change the switching frequency from the default value See also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating I2N on page 360 2607 SWITCH FREQ Selects the control method for the switching frequency ON Selection has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING LOAD FREQ is 4 kHz Drive maximum current is automatically derated according to the selected switching frequency see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating I2N on page 360 and adapted according to the drive temperature It is recommended to use this selection when a specific switching frequency is required with maximum performance fau limit Drive temperature T 80 100 C 100 120 C Temperature depends on the drive output frequency Actual signals and parameters 235
246. l panel Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section LEDs on page 356 E LCD display Divided into three main areas f Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 89 g Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms h Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display Control panels 89 Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC u LOC UMAIN MENU 1 0 4 00 4 No Field Alternatves Significance Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the REM Drive control is remote such as the drive LEN I O or fieldbus Forward shaft direction Reverse sha
247. lay digital CONTROL and analog output control 8424 ST1 0s 8434 2s 8444 0 2s 8454 2 s State change CHANGE DLY delay 8425 ST1 TRIG ENTER 8435 ENTER 8445 ENTER 8455 ENTER TO ST 2 SETPNT SETPNT SETPNT SETPNT 8426 ST1 TRIG NOT SEL 8436 CHANGE 8446 CHANGE 8456 CHANGE State change TO STN DLY DLY DLY trigger 8427 ST1 STATE 1 8437 STATE 8 8447 STATE 8 8457 STATE 8 STATE N 6596 0 8460 ST5 REF 40 8470 8480 0 8490 0 State SEL reference 8461 ST5 START 8471 START 8481 DRIVE 8491 Run direction COMMANDS FRW FRW STOP and stop commands 8462 ST5 Os 8472 1 5s 8 E 8 Acceleration RAMP deceleration ramp time 8463 ST5 OUT AO 0 8473 AO 0 8483 DO 1 8493 RO 1 Relay digital CONTROL and analog output control 8464 ST5 0 2s 8474 0s 8484 O s 8494 O S State change CHANGE DLY delay 8465ST5TRIG ENTER 8475 NOT SEL 8485 NOT SEL 8495 LOGIC TO ST6 SETPNT VAL 8466ST5 TRIG SUPRV1 8476 CHANGE 8486 LOGIC 8496 NOT SEL State change TOST N OVER DLY VAL trigger 8467 ST5 STATE 7 8477 STATE 2 8487 STATE 1 8497 STATE 1 STATE N 174 Program features Safe torque off STO function See Appendix Safe torque off STO on page 399 Actual signals and parameters 175 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter It also contains a
248. lculated motor pole pair number calculation is based on parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED values CR 9914 PHASE Inverts two phases in the motor cable This changes the INVERSION direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box NO phases not inverted NN ves jPhasesinvered 300 Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 301 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system through a fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus For fieldbus adapter control see chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transaction is half duplex The embedded fieldbus can be connected with either RS 232 control panel connector X2 or ElA 485 terminal X1 of the optional FMBA 01 Modbus adapter connected to drive terminal X3 The maximum length of the communication cable with RS 232 is restricted to 3 meters For more information on the FMBA 01 Modbus adapter module see FMBA 01 Modbus adapter module user s manual 3AFE68586704 English R
249. ldbus Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 325 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network through fieldbus adapter System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system through a fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus For embedded fieldbus control see chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 307 Fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal X3 326 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Data flow lt a Control word CW 8 References Status word SW Actual values gt 8 oM Parameter R W requests responses Process I O cyclic Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources eg digital and analog inputs The drive can communicate to a control system through a fieldbus adapter using eg the following serial communication protocols Other protocols may be available contact your local ABB representative e PROFIBUS DP FPBA 01 adapter e CANopen FCAN 01 adapter DeviceNet FDNA 01 ada
250. le boca enous Pedo rs se ah eck eee sess he SIG EE NIE beris d er 20 General Safety suscrita atadas deca ae doc dee 20 2 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains 233 4 9d dod Dd RECO leader ita DRE EORR dead dad i d 21 Applicability ice aia bud aoa rato aa rare AAA OE 21 Target audience c22n2255 4 IrReRCXereESI RE M XE Pes W448 S54 a E dan 21 Purpose ur the Isla ocupo dotar le edo PES Rb do EE d don 21 coments f iis Maal vecrreiixne eee oo bead teati DRE eee es eek eZ 22 Related documents 2st 22305 EE Roe veka sabe RA A cakes 23 Categorization by frame size coins ded e doa eoo ie ee o Uode es de doa odo a dt 23 Quick installation and commissioning flowchart 000 0000 eee ee eee 24 3 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains o2s c lt 56 seated coun od 35 Geese eee eo RS he Reese PS Sees 25 Operation Principle 2s casas ri 25 Product OVerVIBW sacred reir der A B CU o RRA di ci 26 fron Ne Pe etek cedeanse terete ees Coad ees seen ee eek sees gee 26 Power connections and control interfaces 0 eee ee 27 Type designation label x22 22 0 cupa RR Re CUR e aC Re Cn lcd ad 28 Tupe desigrialo Key r sesuci be tenida faac eee eos DORMIRE Ped baaa ee 29 4 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains scsi act emo rr 31 Checking the installation site llli 31 Requirements for the installation site l eee 31 Required 100lS 4
251. le RIOT If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 G2 The display briefly shows message LoC before returning to the previous display To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST 80 Control panels B Output mode In the Output mode you can monitor actual values of up to three group 07 OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing F7 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one group 01 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the right Page 83 tells how to select up to three signals to be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 83 you can browse them in the Output mode To browse the signals forward press key CAD repeatedly To browse them backward press key SY repeatedly o 49 OUTPUT F WD Display a 491 OUTPUT F WD in 05 OUTPUT F WD 101 OUTPUT F WD Control panels 81 EB Reference mode In the Reference mode you can e set the speed frequency or tor
252. le with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers trade names in parentheses e Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath BICC General Corp Philsheath e Rockbestos Co Gardex Oaknite CL X Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers Belden LAPPKABEL OLFLEX Pirelli Selecting the control cables B General rules All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a for example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables for analog signals Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analog signals Planning the electrical installation 41 A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but a single shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable Figure b is also usable However for frequency input always use a shielded cable Double shielded twisted Single shielded twisted multipair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals are run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable E Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen for example OLFLEX by LAPP
253. lected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The default macro is the ABB standard macro It provides a general purpose I O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Default values with different macros on page 176 For information on other macros see chapter Application macros on page 109 The default I O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below X1A E Output frequency reference 0 10 V 1 10kohmy et one Ae EE era Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 ohm 6 GND Analog input circuit common EDO I Output Irequency value 0 20 mA 8 GND Analog output circuit common 200 Aula voltage output 24 V DO max 200mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage outputcommon 1 DOOM Digital input common a n Stop Start X1B 38 RONC h mu 1 58 Digital output max 100 mA pour No fault Fault 1 X1C STO OUT1 STO Safe torque off connection He fore aint 4 N2 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 1 AM is used as a speed reference if vector mode is selected 2 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI3 DI4 Operation parameter O JO Set speed through Al1 11 0 Speed 1 1202 jo 1 Speed 2 1203 Speed 3 1204 Electrical installation 55 30 ramp times according to parameters 2202 and 2203 1 ramp times accor
254. lication macros Torque control macro This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 8 TORQUE CTRL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 176 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 51 B Default I O connections X1A Son Siona cabe stow eee a temen l 8 GND Analog input creuit common TT de ev Reference votage 10 VDC max 10MA Deeps ae Motor torque reference Torque 4 20 ma max sod ohm MEE Analog input circuit common Ore OMe I I oo e GND Analog output creuitcommon Se eae unita votage output 24 VDO mas 200 mA hio oND Auxiliary voltage output common W DCOM Digital inputcommon 12 Di1 Stop 0 Start 1 Speed X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 e 3m Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 1 Speed control Changes rotation direction 4 The signal source is powered externally See Torque control Changes torque direction the manufacturer s instructions To use 2 0 ramp times according to parameters sensors supplied by the drive aux voltage 2202 and 2203 output see page 53 1 ramp times according to param
255. ll a hand operated supply disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work 38 Planning the electrical installation E European union To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types e aswitch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 adisconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 E Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive Check that the 3 phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to the rating table in section Ratings on page 358 The table lists the typical motor power for each drive type Only one permanent magnet synchronous motor can be connected to the inverter output Selecting the power cables B General rules Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents See section Ratings on page 358 for the
256. lue faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value To save the new value press f J cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ Select the setting line with a parameter number with LOC Cw MAIN MENU DARAN CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER I O SETTI NGS TART STOP E1 IR E1 EXIT 00 a LOC UPAR EDIT 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS I 2 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 3 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE aus Ul 0 SETTI NGS 1007 START PLS El ee STOP PLS E1 EXIT 100 00 108 Control panels Application macros 109 Application macros What this chapter contains The chapter describes the application macros For each macro there is a wiring diagram showing the default control connections digital and analog I O The chapter also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Overview of macros Application macros are pre programmed parameter sets While starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros the one that is best suited for the purpose with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro The ACS355 has seven standard macros and three user macros The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications Macro Suitable applications ABB standard Ordinary speed control applications where no one
257. m 30 in 372 Technical data Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal PC ABS 2 mm PC 10 GF 2 5 3 mm and PA66 25 GF 1 5 mm all in color NCS 1502 Y RAL 9002 PMS 420 C hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers extruded aluminium AISi Corrugated cardboard The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte which is classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Applicable standards ENISO 13849 1 2008 e IEC EN 60204 1 2006 IEC EN 62061 2005 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 IEC EN 61800 5 2 2007 e UL 508C The drive complies with the following standards Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control systems Part 1 general principles for design Safe
258. mA VERE AN ia Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 355 7 Install the new fan holder including the fan in reverse order 8 Restore power Capacitors B Reforming the capacitors The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year See section Type designation label on page 28 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for capacitor reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 ACS355 ACS550 and ACH550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to http www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Power connections iy WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 17 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Check the tightness of the power cable connections Use the tightening torques given in section Terminal and lead through data for the power cables on page 366 3 Restore power 356 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Control panel E Cleaning the control panel Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display windo
259. me sizes R3 and R4 I O clamping plate for frame sizes RO R2 fieldbus option ground plate clamps and screws panel cover 3 e mounting template integrated into the package 4 user s manual 5 possible options fieldbus potentiometer extension module all with instructions basic control panel or assistant control panel Checking the delivery Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type See section Type designation label on page 28 34 Mechanical installation Installing The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection To comply with NEMA 1 use the MUL1 R1 MUL1 R3 or MUL1 R4 option kit which is delivered with multilingual installation instructions 3AFE68642868 3AFE686431 47 or 3AUA0000025916 respectively BW Install the drive Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate Note Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation With screws 1 Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the package The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter Dimension drawings on page 379 The number and location of the holes used depend on how the
260. med PID SET 1 2 control Timed function 1 inactive PID SET 1 timed function 1 active PID SET 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS DH NV inverted digital input OM 0 PIDSET2 1 PIDSETT SE2 T Ny Ol BB GO PO o o 0 m ul 4 o o Actual signals and parameters 271 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV See selection D 1 INV See selection D 1 INV 5 4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN MAA 4102 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME TIME 4103 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME TIME 4104 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER 4105 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV 106 UNITS Ses parameter 2008 UNITS 4107 UNIT SCALE 4108 0 VALUE 4109 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4110 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL SEL 4111 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT 4112 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN MIN 4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX MAX 4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL EM 4115 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 4116 ACT1INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4117 ACT21NPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4118 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4119 ACT1 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4120 ACT2 See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4121 ACT2
261. mit 750000 1500000 Corrected reference rpm Ma x limit Min limit COMM 750000 1500000 REF COMM REF 1500000 Min limit 750000 Max limit COMM REF 1500000 Min limit Corrected reference rpm 750000 Max limit Corrected reference rpm Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN 334 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter E Fieldbus reference scaling Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled for the DCU profile as shown in the following table Note Any correction of the reference see section Reference selection and correction on page 332 is applied before scaling Reference Range Reference type REF1 214783648 Speed or 10002 1 rpm 1Hz Final reference limited by a 1104 1105 Actual motor speed 214783647 limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 214783648 Speed or 1000 1 Final reference limited by Jos 1107 1108 Actual motor speed 214783647 limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 1000 1 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque 1 or 2016 2018 torque 2 PID 1000 1 Final reference limited by reference 4012 4013 PID set 1 or 4112 4113 PID set 2 Note The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling W Reference handling
262. mode otherwise by pissed peeled EP until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Time and date mode by selecting TIME amp LOC TIME DATE I DATE on the menu with keys a and SY 7 and OCK VI STB Y pressing ATE_FORMAT E M E AT EXI 00 00 SE To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY oC wCLOCK VI SI B 1 on the menu press Em select Show clock Hide clock and press AD or if you want to return to the ide cloc previous display without making changes press 7 EXIT 100 00 SEL To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on LOC uDATE FORMAT 1 the menu press TQ a and select a suitable format OK NCEL Press s to save or tT to cancel your changes To specify the time e format select TIME FORMAT on LOC TIME FORMAT 1 the menu press Sal and select a suitable format 4 Press as to save or to cancel your changes 12 Sa ES y 9 CANCEL 100 00 SEL Control panels 103 Sep ti n pay To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and LOC OSET TI ME press 5 Specify the hours with keys A and and press i wl Then specify the minutes Press lt to save or SP to cancel your changes 4 1 CANCEL 1 00 00 OK To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and LOC OSET DATE press 3 Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with 0 3 0 5 keys 4
263. motor type 9903 1 AM Asynchronous motor e 2 PMSM Permanent magnet motor Setting of parameter 9903 is shown below as an example of parameter setting with the basic control panel You find more detailed instructions in section Basic control panel on page 75 1 To go to the Main menu press 37 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom 2 Press keys CANS Y until you see PAr and press N 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with keys C A S Y and press X 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys Ca y v 7 62 Start up control with I O and ID run 5 Press and hold w7 for about two seconds until the parameter value is shown with under the value REM 1 PAR BR F WD 6 Change the value with keys CANS v 7 The value changes faster while you keep the key pressed 2 down PAR F WD 7 Save the parameter value by pressing 37 O Select the application macro parameter 9902 according to how the control cables are connected The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases L Select the motor control mode parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 2 VECTOR TORQ is suitable for torque control applications 3 SCALAR FREQ is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20
264. msareinasive O 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown DEFAULT Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows for easy customization of the parameter list eg selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop user s manual 3AFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 LOAD FD SET DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists O FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list Does not include short parameter 1 list Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible 1612 FAN Selects the fan to be switched on and off automatically or AUTO CONTROL keeps the fan on all the time When the drive is used in ambient temperatures of 35 C and above it is recommended to have the cooling fan always on selection ON Actual signals and parameters 209 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq AUTO Automatic fan control The fan is switched on when the drive is modulating After the drive has stopped the fan stays on until the temperature of the drive has dropped below 55 C The fan then remains switched off until either the drive is started or the temperature increases above 65 C If the control board is powered from an external 24 V power supply t
265. n and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency see page 368 WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required B Category C2 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency see page 368 WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required B Category C3 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 second environment see page 373 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The internal EMC filter is connected the metal screw at EMC is in place or the optional EMC filter is installed 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive
266. n modules have similar enclosures and they are mounted between the control panel and the drive Therefore only one extension module can be used for a drive ACS355 IP66 67 UL Type 4X drives are not compatible with extension modules due to space restrictions The following optional extension modules are available for the ACS355 The drive automatically identifies the module which is ready for use after the installation and power up MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module e MREL 01 output relay module e MPOW 01 auxiliary power module 394 Appendix Extension modules Generic extension module layout Grounding stand off Panel port adapter B Installation Checking the delivery The option package contains extension module grounding stand off with an M3 x 12 screw panel port adapter fixed to the MPOW 01 module at the factory Installing the extension module f WARNING Follow the safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 17 To install the extension module 1 2 If not already off remove input power from the drive Remove the control panel or panel cover See how to remove the panel cover in step 1 on page 56 Remove the grounding screw in the top left corner of the drive s control panel slot and install the grounding stand off in its place For the MREL 01 and MTAC 01 ensure that the panel port adapter is attached to either the panel port of the drive or the mate part of the ex
267. n on page 59 Operation principle and hardware description 25 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains The chapter briefly describes the operation principle layout type designation label and type designation information It also shows a general diagram of power connections and control interfaces Operation principle The ACS355 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling asynchronous AC induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive The rectifier converts three phase AC voltage to DC voltage The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage The inverter converts the DC voltage back to AC voltage for the AC motor The brake chopper connects the external brake resistor to the intermediate DC circuit when the voltage in the circuit exceeds its maximum limit Rectifier Capacitor Inverter bank U1 AC supply V AC motor Brake chopper K L a BRK BRK Common DC terminals 26 Operation principle and hardware description Product overview E Layout The layout of the drive is presented below The construction of the different frame sizes RO R4 varies to some extent Covers on RO and R1 Mounting holes N
268. nalog control signal levels Check connections 0009 0010 0011 0012 0014 FAULT MOT OVERTEMP 4310 0305 bit 8 programmable fault function 3005 3009 3504 PANEL LOSS 5300 0305 bit 9 programmable fault function 3002 ID RUN FAIL FF84 0305 bit 10 MOTOR STALL 7121 0305 bit 11 programmable fault function 3010 3012 EXT FAULT 1 9000 0305 bit 13 programmable fault function 3003 Fault tracing 345 CAUSE WHAT TO DO Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling too high or appears to be too high due to Check start up data excessive load Check fault function parameters insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor Check value of fault limit pases e Check that actual number of sensors exceeded fault limit set corresponds to value set by parameter by parameter 3504 3591 SENSOR TYPE FAULT LIMIT Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Control panel selected Check panel connection as active control Check fault function parameters location for drive has ceased Check control panel connector communicating Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references through control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENC
269. nce change DI3U 4D Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change COMM Fieldbus reference REF 1 COMM AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al See section Reference selection and correction on page 308 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 308 190 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3U 4D RNC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change DI3U 4D NC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference
270. nd 4017 ACT2 INPUT Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7 Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 Square root of ACT1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 value Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 value Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Parameter is used mainly in applications where feedback value is calculated from another variable eg flow from pressure difference Multiplier If parameter value is set to zero no multiplier is 1 0 001 32 767 used Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also Al2 parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM POWER Uses power for ACT1 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0758 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 7 FREQ INPUT Frequency input 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2 See also Al2 parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM EN See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT or BR Gd NM o A or A 0O N D Mu o w jo O o O KA o e e n o m Ko Actual signals and parameters 267 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4018 ACTI Sets the minimum value for ACT1 0 Nn Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done 1 Analog
271. nd the drive consists of 16 bit input and output data words with the ABB drives profile and 32 bit input and output words with the DCU profile B Control word and Status word The Control word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control word The Status word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller E References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference eg reverse direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as the speed frequency torque or process reference B Actual values Actual values ACT are 16 bit words containing selected values of the drive 308 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus references B Reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference called COMM in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a reference selection parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT to COMM COMM Al1 or COMM AI1 When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM Al1 or COMM AI1 the fieldbus reference is corrected us
272. nditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger The following warning symbols are used in this manual Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by L electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment 18 Safety Safety in installation and maintenance These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor B Electrical safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive J Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or motor cable Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that 1 there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground 2 there is no voltage between terminals BRK and BRK and the ground Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage ev
273. nes the maximum supplied current during torque boost 100 CURR See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION 2 ds Llalla oo po m z O saf o p 15 300 Value in percent 1 1 2111 STOP SIGNAL Defines the stop signal delay time when parameter 2102 0 ms DLY STOP FUNCTION is set to SPEED COMP 0 10000 ms Delay time Actual signals and parameters 223 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2112 ZERO SPEED Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function The 0 0 function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick NOT SEL restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero speed delay With Zero speed delay Speed Speed controller Speed controller switched off Motor remains live Motor is coasts to stop decelerated to true 0 Zero speed No Zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero speed the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The inverter modulates motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick r
274. nformation Parameter 106 backup How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals I O settings Control panels 91 How to get help Display Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys CA and Cw After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing CZ How to find out the panel version 1 If the power is switched on switch it off EE 2 Keep key pressed down while you switch on the PANEL VERSION INFO power and read the information The display shows the W X XX following panel information 3 ARA Panel SW panel firmware version XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the C key the panel goes to the Output mode 92 Control panels How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control io si n aay To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local control LOC shown on the status line press 2 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK The very first time the drive is powered up
275. ng the braking cycle W Erpulse energy conducted into the resistor during a single braking pulse J fon length of the braking pulse s T length of the braking cycle s Resistor types shown in the table are pre dimensioned resistors using the maximum braking power with cyclic braking shown in the table Resistors are available from ABB Information is subject to change without further notice Type Rmin max PBRmax Selection table by resistor type ACS355 CBR V CBT H Braking time 2 x E U ohm ohm kW hp 160 210 260 460 660 560 s 01x02A4 2 70 390 0 37 O5 fe o1x04a7 2 40 200 075 1 e 4 01x 06A7 2 wets e j 2a 01x 07A5 2 151 2 e pp to 01x 09A8 2 22 3 je 14 03x 02A4 2 70 390 0 37 05 99 03x 03A5 2 70 260 0 55 O76 e 6 08x 04A7 2 40 200 075 1 4 03x 06A7 2 sel ppp e 08x 07A5 2 30 100 15 2 e to 08x 09A8 2 30 70 22 8 m4 08x 13A3 2 30 50 80 4 o 6 08x 17A6 2 30 40 40 5 ol 142 08x 2444 2 18 25 55 75 fe 45 08x 31402 7 19 75 to le 3 noj 15 le 3 Appendix Resistor braking 391 Type Rmin PBRmax Selection table by resistor type ACS355 CBR V CBT H Braking time 2 1 E EMC filter connected metal EMC filter screw installed 00353783 xls J U
276. ns The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed E Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed 44 Planning the electrical installation WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal A overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current E Protecting the motor against thermal overload According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to the drive The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature measurement function further by parameters The most common temperature sensors are e motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch for example Klixon e motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 For more inform
277. nted on the right is shown 72 Start up control with I O and ID run Control panels 73 Control panels What this chapter contains The chapter describes the control panel keys LED indicators and display fields It also instructs in using the panel in control monitoring and changing the settings About control panels Use a control panel to control the ACS355 read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two different control panel types Basic control panel This panel described in section Basic control panel on page 75 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant control panel This panel described in section Assistant control panel on page 87 includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Applicability The manual is applicable to panels with the panel revisions and the panel firmware versions given in the table below Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware version Basic control panel ACS CP C 1 13 or later Assistant control panel ACS CP A 2 04 or later Assistant control panel Asia ACS CP D 2 04 or later 74 Control panels To find out the panel revision see the label on the back of the panel An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ABB Oy ACS CP A S N M0935E0001 RoHS Y DL
278. o the manual Quick installation and commissioning flowchart Task See Identify the frame size of your drive RO R4 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key on page 29 Technical data Ratings on page 358 Plan the installation select the cables etc Planning the electrical installation on page 37 Check the ambient conditions ratings and Technical data on page 357 required cooling air flow Unpack and check the drive Mechanical installation Unpacking on page dd If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description ungrounded or corner grounded system Type designation key on page 29 check that the internal EMC filter is not Electrical installation Checking the connected compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems on page 48 Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet Mechanical installation on page 31 Route the cables Planning the electrical installation Routing the cables on page 41 Check the insulation of the input cable and the Electrical installation Checking the insulation motor and the motor cable of the assembly on page 47 Connect the power cables Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 49 Connect the control cables Electrical installation Connecting the control cables on page 51 Check the installation Installation checklist on page 57 Commission the drive Start up control with I O and ID ru
279. oes not enter the drive during the installation Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction Ensure sufficient cooling 20 Safety Safe start up and operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive B Electrical safety Permanent magnet motor drives These warnings concern permanent magnet motor drives Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment WARNING It is not recommended to run the permanent magnet motor over 1 2 times the rated speed Motor overspeed may lead to overvoltage which may permanently damage the drive B General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the control panel start and stop keys and or e
280. of the nominal current of the drive whenthe drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected 3 SCALAR FREQ is not recommended for permanent magnet motors O Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate setting the value of parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive Asynchronous motor nameplate example 380 V supply voltage 6312 3 Me 6210 03 180 IEC 34 1 Start up control with O and ID run 63 Permanent magnet motor nameplate example AK EP EP PAPE S4836N4008E43C10 lo in 91 9 5A IP65 ip 278A Insulation class F To Tn 10 5 10 5 Nm Tp 31 5 Nm C Pn 3 3 kW Fn 200 Hz n 3000 rf mi Bemf Nn a Feedback RE E Brake Nie 68847184AA12345 5 N 1 2007 Made in Japan e motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 For permanent magnet motors enter the back emf voltage at nominal speed here Otherwise use nominal voltage and perform ID run If the voltage is given as voltage per rpm eg 60 V per 1000 rpm the voltage for 3000 rpm nominal speed is 3 60V 180 V e motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 loy A motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 e motor nominal speed parameter 9908 motor
281. on codes for the holding 4xxxx register Code Function name Additional information hex dec fee ee ic 03 device 03 03 6 Preset single 4X Presets a value into a single register 4X reference When 06 10 16 17 23 0 06 register broadcast the function presets the same register reference in all attached slaves Preset multiple 4X Presets values into a sequence of registers 4X references When 16 registers broadcast the function presets the same register references in all attached slaves Read Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write 23 registers operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus transaction Write operation is performed before the read operation Note In the Modbus data message register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx 1 For example register 40002 is addressed as 0001 E Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The drive supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table Name Description S O Illegal Function Unsupported command Illegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read write protected Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive Value is outside minimum or maximum limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write is not allowed when start is active Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is selected Drive parameter 5378 E
282. on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Note Larger fuses must not be used when the input power cable is selected according to this table Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings ACS355 gG UL Class Supply Motor PE Brake T 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK BRK x E U A A mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG 14 12 00 09A8 2 25 35 7 35 6 10 25 12 6 10 12 FO5ci3AS2 30 6 0 6 10 6 10 25 12 F05ct7A62 35 6 0 6 10 8 10 25 12 05 24A4 2 68 10 8 10 8 t0 8 6 10 05 31A02 80 80 16 6 16 10 8 2 100 100 25 4 o je 03x 46A2 2 6 t6 2 es 2 362 Technical data Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings ACS355 gG 0 ted FT Supply Motor PE Brake T 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK BRK x E U A A mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG 25 i2 15 14 05 31A04 80 80 F05 38A04 100 100 16 4 16 4 16 4 05 44A04 100 100 25 4 25 4 16 4 10 8 1 If 5096 overload capacity is needed use the larger fuse alternative 00353783 xls J E 5 Es 10 16 16 Technical data 363 Dimensions weights and free space requi
283. ontrol with Sequence programming E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information RO Control word through fieldbus control RO 1 status RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only Frequency input Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input Frequency input 0 16000 Hz can be used as the external reference signal source The update time for the frequency input is 50 ms Update time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 50 ms gt 2 ms B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and filtering 1103 1106 External reference REF1 2 through frequency input 4010 4110 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0161 Frequency input value 134 Program features Transistor output The drive has one programmable transistor output The output can be used either as a digital output or frequency output 0 16000 Hz The update time for the transistor frequency output is 2 ms B Settings Additional information Group 78 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Transistor output settings 8423 Transistor output control with Sequence programming E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0163 Transistor output status 0164 Transistor output frequency Actual signals Several actual signals are available Drive output frequency current
284. opened 1601 Motor status Acceleration Deceleration time 2202 time 2203 NOT SEL External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Start enable If Start enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 AA 2021 is activated 208 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start 7 enable Start disable signal ie control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 bit 19 for Start enable 2 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 320 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Start enable If Start enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and DIANV alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING 2021 is activated 1609 START Selects the source for the Start enable 2 signal See NOT SEL ENABLE 2 parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1 See parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1 1 2 1610 DISPLAY Activates deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT 2001 NO ALARMS OVERVOLTAGE 2002 UNDERVOLTAGE 2003 and DEVICE OVERTEMP 2009 For more information see chapter Fault tracing on page 335 No Alar
285. ot in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key A or SY until you see CoPY Press 7 the drive to the control panel step to uL with keys C A and Cv Press 7 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A Download all is used as an example with keys A and Cw Press SS During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion To upload all parameters including user sets from W Basic control panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Fault tracing on page 335 the basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarms generated by the basic control panel on page 341 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Control panels 87 Assistant control panel B Features The assistant control panel features alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display language selection for the display e Start up assistant to ease drive commissioning copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help real time clock 88 Control panels B Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the assistant contro
286. ote The screw is on the front in frame Panel cover a basic control panel b size R4 assistant control panel c Varistor grounding screw VAR Terminal cover or optional potentiometer 12 Fieldbus adapter serial communication unit MPOT 01 connection VO connections 6 Option connection 14 Input power connection U1 V1 W1 STO Safe torque off connection brake resistor connection BRK BRK j8 FlashDrop connection and motor connection U2 V2 W2 Power OK and Fault LEDs See section Mr page oso Cooling outlet through top cover EMC filter grounding screw EMC Operation principle and hardware description 27 B Power connections and control interfaces The diagram gives an overview of connections I O connections are parameterable See chapter Application macros on page 109 for I O connections for the different macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 47 for installation in general 8 me Control panel RJ 45 M RT Screen 10 SCR 13 232 Analog input 20 Al al AO Analog output 3oGND mare GNDo8 0 20 mA Reference voltage 08 40 10V 10 V DC max 10 mA PROGRAMMABLE RELAY Analog input 2 50 Al2 AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 60 GND EROGO 17 Relay output Aux voltage output 9o 24 V 18 550 AC 30V DC 6A 24 V DC max 200 mA 100 GND RONOS 19 110 DCOM DOSRCS gt Digital frequency output 120 DI Y gt DOOUT 21 PNP transistor type 30 V DC max 100 mA PROGRAMMABLE 19PDI2 p22 DI
287. otection of the brake resistor connection see Brake resistor connection on page 370 Alternatively a two conductor shielded cable with the same cross sectional area can be used Protecting the system in brake resistor overheating situations The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 Fuses Q Thermal switch of the resistor U1 V1 Wi Electrical installation For the brake resistor connections see the power connection diagram of the drive on page 49 Start up To enable resistor braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control by setting parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to 0 DISABLE Appendix Extension modules 393 Appendix Extension modules What this chapter contains The appendix describes common features and mechanical installation of the optional extension modules for the ACS355 MPOW 01 auxiliary power module MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module and MREL 01 output relay module The appendix also describes specific features and electrical installation for the MPOW 01 for information on the MTAC 01 and MREL 01 refer to the corresponding user s manual Extension modules E Description Extensio
288. ource for the signal is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND COUNTER Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 START COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded Stop with counter stop signal Source for the signal is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND Actual signals and parameters 187 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq SEQ PROG Start stop and direction commands through Sequence 6 programming See parameter group 84 SEQUENCE PROG 1002 EXT2 Defines the connections and the source for the start stop NOT SEL COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 BA See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor or fixes REQUES the direction T 1 2 section Control of a mechanical brake on page 157 Digital input DI1 O jogging inactive 1 jogging active Fieldbus interface as the source for jogging 1 or 2 activation ie control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits 20 and 21 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 320 NOT SEL DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 jogging inactive 0 jogging active INV See selection DI1 INV 2 See selection DI1 INV See selection DI1 INV I5 INV See selection DI1 INV 1101 CEDAR REF S
289. ours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 07 00 00 timed function 1 is activated at 7 00 7 a m 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 18 00 00 timed function 1 is deactivated at 18 00 6 p m Example If parameter value is set to MONDAY timed WEDNESDAY function 1 is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY 805 STOP DAY 1 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 Example If parameter is set to FRIDAY timed function 1 is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 606 START TIME 507 STOP TIME 2 508 START DAY 609 STOP DAY 610 START TIMES 8r STOP TIMES 612 START DAYS 615 STOP DAYS 814 START TIME 615 STOP TIME 4 260 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 516 START DAY 4 517 STOP DAV 3622 Su uem Selects the source for the booster activation signal NOT SEL EL NOT SEL No booster activation signal DI Digital input DI1 1 active O inactive Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated after the booster activation signal is switched off 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to D 1 and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01 30 00 the booster is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated Booster active ad Lt q
290. p 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted See the table below Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL STD MODBUS Initializes embedded fieldbus SEL STD MODBUS _ with EIA 485 communication EXT FBA MODBUS RS232 with RS 232 MODBUS RS232 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 5302 EFB STATION 0 247 Defines the station ID address of ID the RS 232 EIA 485 link No two stations on line may have the same address 5303 EFB BAUD 1 2 kbit s Defines the communication RATE 2 4 kbit s speed of the RS 232 EIA 485 4 8 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 115 2 kbit s 5304 EFB PARITY Selects the parity setting The same settings must be used in all on line stations 5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Selects the communication profile PROFILE DCU PROFILE used by the drive See section ABB DRV FULL Communication profiles on page 375 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 Any Selects an actual value to be Qd rae mapped to Modbus register 400xx 5317 EFB PAR 17 After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set the drive control parameters shown in section Drive control parameters on page 304 must be checked and adjusted when necessary The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset 304 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus
291. p mode you can Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID run View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes eg the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 57 EXT COMM MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the int
292. page 17 must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on and the drive is in the remote control mode Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or e an ID run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy 60 Start up control with I O and ID run Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page 57 How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have if any f you have no control panel follow the instructions given in section How to start up the drive without a control panel on page 60 f you have a basic control panel ACS CP C follow the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 61 f you have an assistant control panel ACS CP A ACS CP D you can either run the Start up assistant see section How to perform a guided start up on page 66 or perform a manual start up see section How to perform a manual start up on page 61 The Start up assistant which is included in the assistant control panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the manual start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic s
293. pend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4010 SET POINT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference A 7 SEL signal Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input m Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 308 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 308 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Actual signals and parameters 265 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3U 4D NC _ Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation MA REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 o al N A Ww C2
294. pment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C1 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the first environment Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution E Category C1 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 374 Technical data 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentatio
295. programming state 0168 SEQ PROG STATE is set to the first state and all timers and outputs RO TO AO are set to zero Reset is possible only when Sequence programming is stopped DI1 INV Reset through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV DIS INV See selection DI1 INV il ill Dy See selection Dny O Reset through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive Reset After reset parameter value is automatically set to NOT SEL 8405 SEQ ST Forces the Sequence programming to a selected state STATE 1 FORCE Note State is changed only when Sequence programming is paused by parameter 8403 SEQ PROG PAUSE and this parameter is set to the selected state 284 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq STATE 7 Smeisocedtosue7 7 8406 SEQLOGIC Defines the source for the logic value 1 Logic value 1 is VAL 1 compared to logic value 2 as defined by parameter 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 Logic operation values are used in state transitions See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N selection LOGIC VAL NV Logie value 1 through inverted digital nou DA DV See selection DION DIG INV See selection Diany SSS oam See selection Brian DINNV See selection Dony EA gt Oi O m r DI1 INV i di SUPRV1 Logic value according to supervision parameters OVER 3201 3203
296. pter Ethernet FENA 01 adapter e Modbus RTU FMBA 01 adapter See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 301 The drive detects automatically which fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal X3 with the exception of FMBA 01 The DCU profile is always used in communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter see section Fieldbus control interface on page 330 The communication profile on the fieldbus network depends on the type and settings of the connected adapter The default profile settings are protocol dependent eg vendor specific profile ABB drives for PROFIBUS and industry standard drive profile AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 327 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in section Attach the optional fieldbus module on page 35 and the module manual The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to EXT FBA The adapter specific parameters in group 57 EXT COMM MODULE must also be set See the table below Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION 9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL EXT FBA Initializes the communication SEL STD MODBUS between the drive
297. q 0 0 500 0 Hz Minimum value in rpm Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the reference source value of parameter 1103 is AIT The reference minimum and maximum correspond to the 7301 MINIMUM All and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows REF Hz rpm REF1MAX 1105 REF1 MIN mE 1104 1302 1301 AI signal 96 REF1 MIN 1301 1302 1104 REF1 MAX _ 1105 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 E 50 0 Hz Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal 0 0 500 0 Hz Maximum value in rpm Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR 0 30000 rom CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ See the example for parameter 1104 HEF1 MIN TT06 REFZ SELECT Selects the signal source lor external reference REFZ A 1 PID1OUT PID controller 1 output See parameter groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 192 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 20 KEYPADINC See parameter 1103 REFI SELECT e Al1 SEQ See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 34 PROG Al2 SEQ See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 35 PROG 1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque S
298. que reference Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the speed frequency or torque reference sip Ain O a SEY Go to the Main menu by pressing x if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing U7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows LoC before switching to local control Note With group 77 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key A or SY until you see rEF and then press S Now the display shows the current reference value with under the value To increase the reference value press 4 To decrease the reference value press Vv 5 Hz The value changes immediately when you press the F WD key It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 82 Control panels E Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can view and change parameter values select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Sip Aston O y Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing UZ
299. r controlled environment Operation Storage Transportation installed for in the protective in the protective stationary use package package Installation site altitude 0 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level above 1000 m 3300 ft see section Derating on page 359 Air temperature 10 50 C 40 70 C 12 40 70 C 12 14 122 F 40 158 F 2 40 158 F 2 No frost allowed See section Derating on page 359 Relative humidity 0 95 Max 95 Max 95 No condensation allowed Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60 in the presence of corrosive gases Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed lee M According to According to According to IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 1 IEC 60721 3 2 chemical gases chemical gases chemical gases Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2 solid particles solid particles solid particles IEC 60721 3 1 Class 3S2 Class 1S2 Class 2S2 Note The drive must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Note Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust Sinusoidal vibration Tested according to IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 3 mechanical conditions Class 3M4 12 in 33 ft s A Shock Not allowed ccording to ISTA 1A According to ISTA 1A IEC 60068 2 27 Max 109 m s Max 109 m s ISTA 1A 830 ft s 11 ms 330 ft s 11 ms Freefall Not allowed 76 cm 30 in 76 c
300. r 2 is defined by parameters 2205 2207 When value is set to 0 1 ramp pair 1 is used Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 With ramp pair 1 2 parameter 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL must be set to SEQ PROG See also parameters 2202 2207 8423 ST1 OUT Selects the relay transistor and analog output control for AO 0 CONTROL Sequence programming state 1 The relay transistor output control must be activated by setting parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1805 DO SIGNAL to SEQ PROG Analog output control must be activated by parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output control values can be monitored with signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL EM UTI I MN energized and analog output is cleared OMM AAA energized and analog output is cleared analog output value is set to zero analog output control is frozen to the previously set value Relay and transistor outputs are energized closed and analog output control is frozen to the previously set value Transistor output is energized closed and relay output is m de energized Analog output control is frozen to the previously set value RO 1 Transistor output is de energized opened and relay output is energized Analog output control is frozen to the previously set value 0 7 0 2 0 1 Actual signals and parameters 289 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq outputs are frozen to the previously set value 0 1 100 0 Value written to signal 0170
301. r 3010 STALL FUNCTION 05 50 0 He T 3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function See parameter 3010 20 s STALL FUNCTION 3013 UNDERLOAD Selects how the drive reacts to underload The protection NOT SEL wakes up if the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE output frequency is higher than 10 of the nominal motor frequency and the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive lO 244 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description FAULT The drive trips on fault UNDERLOAD 0017 and the motor coasts to stop Note Set parameter value to FAULT only after the drive ID run is performed If FAULT is selected the drive may generate an UNDERLOAD fault during ID run ALARM The drive generates alarm UNDERLOAD 2011 2 3014 UNDERLOAD Defines the time limit for the underload function See 2 TIM parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC 104005 3015 UNDERLOAD Selects the load curve for the underload function See parameter 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC Os 1218s 1 Tm nominal torque of the motor fyn nominal frequency of the motor 9907 Underload curve types fN Number of the load curve type in the figure E 3016 SUPPLY Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss ie when FAULT FAULT The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE 0022 and the motor coasts to stop
302. r 8446 8447 STATE 4 State N par 8450 8454 c Go to state N par 8456 8457 Go to state 5 par 8455 STATE 5 State N par 8460 8464 L Go to state N par 8466 8467 State N STATE 6 par 8470 8474 a Go to state N par 8476 8477 Go to state 7 par 8475 STATE 7 State N par 8480 8484 c Go to state N par 8486 8487 Go to state 8 par 8485 STATE 8 State N par 8490 8494 lt Go to state N par 8496 8497 0168 1 State 1 Go to state 2 par 8425 0168 2 State 2 0168 3 State 3 Go to state 4 par 8445 0168 4 State 4 0168 5 State 5 Go to state 6 par 8465 0168 6 State 6 0168 7 State 7 0168 8 State 8 Go to state 1 par 8495 State N State change to state N has a NN State higher priority than state change to X X Actual signal the next state State change Program features 169 E Example 1 Seq start State change trigger Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1 ST1 Drive is started in reverse direction with 50 Hz reference and 10 s ramp time State 1 is active for 40 s ST2 Drive is accelerated to 20 Hz with 60 s ramp time State 2 is active for 120 s ST3 Drive is accelerated to 25 Hz with 5 s ramp time State 3 is active until the Sequence programming is disabled or until booster start is activated by DI2 ST4 Drive is accel
303. r as the time the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Motor load Temp rise 100 Par 3006 256 9089s Actual signals and parameters 241 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3007 MOT LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 100 CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 C 86 F ambient temperature and below 1000 m 3300 ft altitude When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation Example If the constant protection level needs to be 115 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 91 115 127 100 Output current relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 Par 3007 100 127 Par 3008 50 Par 3009 50 150 Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor 1 1 current 3008 ZERO SPEED Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70 E Ar AN 25 150 Allowed continuous motor loa
304. rated currents The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use For US see section Aaditional US requirements on page 40 The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor same cross sectional area e 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC Refer to chapter Technical data on page 357 for the EMC requirements A symmetrical shielded motor cable see the figure below must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE and C Tick marks A four conductor system is allowed for input cabling but a shielded symmetrical cable is recommended Compared to a four conductor system the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear Planning the electrical installation 39 E Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below Motor cables Note A separate PE conductor is required recommended for input cables also if the conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the purpose Symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield PE Shield i conductor Shield and shield PE e PE Allowed as input cables Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor P
305. rce Ramp function generator output to zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED Halt ramping Ramp function generator output held Normal operation Enter OPERATING Force Ramp function generator input to zero Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if par 1604 is set to COMM Continue normal operation Value _ a E CA RAMP_HOLD RAMP_IN_ ZERO RESET Not in use 1 02 1 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 317 ABB drives profile Control word parameter 5379 EFB PAR 19 Bit Name Value Comments 10 Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled ABB DRV FULL Control word 0 or reference 0 Retain last Control word and reference Control word O and reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM 12 Reserved Status word The table below and the state diagram on page 379 describe the Status word content for the ABB drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the diagram ABB drives profile EFB Status word parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 3 Val
306. rection commands or references through control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings 2009 DEVICE Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions See also OVERTEMP temperatureis section Derating on page 359 0308 bit 8 breui Alarm limit Check air flow and fan operation Check motor power against drive power 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings load and cooling 0308 bit 9 too high or appears to Check start up data be too high due to programmable fault excessive load Check fault function parameters function insufficient motor 3005 3009 3503 power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor Check value of alarm limit RUM e jon Check that actual number of sensors exceeded alarm limit corresponds to value set by parameter set by parameter 3503 ALARM LIMIT 3501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is toolow Check for problem in driven 0308 bit 10 due to eg release equipment mechanism in driven programmable fault equipment Check fault function parameters function Check motor power against drive 3013 3015 power 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings 0308 bit 11 Rede eeu M 9 9 Check fault function parameters programmable fault insufficient motor function power 3010 3012
307. red automatically after power switch off To decrease the value press Cv If you are not in the Output mode press tz repeatedly until you get there To increase the contrast press keys 7 and lt a simultaneously To decrease the contrast press keys Ew and SY simultaneously 00 00 MENU Control panels 95 E Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can view and change parameter values Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Ain O Be S M Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC OMAIN MENU Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until NW WWE Y you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR X EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys As and SY 7 and pressing ENTER Select the appropriate parameter group with keys A and SY 7 Select the appropriate parameter with keys A and y The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter EDIT Press s LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys A LOC OPAR EDIT and SY 7 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value 990
308. reference minimum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 1104 HEF1 MIN Note MINIMUM Al1 value must not exceed MAXIMUM Al1 value Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 198 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 10 mA 20 mA 100 50 1303 FILTER Al Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 ie the time within which 6396 of a step change is reached Unfiltered signal Filtered signal Time constant 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V
309. reformed if the drive has been stored over a year The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct torque OOOO LI 58 Installation checklist Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque The motor cable input power cable and control cables are routed separately The external control I O connections are OK Safe torque off STO connections operation and reaction are OK The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive with a bypass connection Terminal cover and for NEMA 1 hood and connection box are in place Start up control with O and ID run 59 Start up control with I O and ID run What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to perform the start up Start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface perform an Identification run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels on page 73 How to start up the drive WARNING The start up may only be carried out by a qualified l SN electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on
310. rements E Dimensions and weights Dimensions and weights IP20 cabinet UL open H1 H2 H3 W D Weight mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb 6 65 6 34 6 65 6 50 6 65 329 169 6 65 169 665 7 13 26 6 55 00353783 xls J Dimensions and weights IP20 NEMA 1 H4 H5 W B Weight mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lo RO 257 1012 280 11 02 70 2 76 i708 70 2 76 169 6 65 i710 105 4 13 769 6 65 1077 169 665 177 697 10 63 320 12 60 6 97 00353783 xls J Symbols IP20 cabinet UL open H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate H2 height with fastenings without clamping plate H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate IP20 NEMA 1 H4 height with fastenings and connection box H5 height with fastenings connection box and hood B Free space requirements Frame Free space required size Above Below On the sides mm in mm in mm in Ro Ra 75 3 75 3 o o 00353783 xls J 364 Technical data Losses cooling data and noise B Losses and cooling data Frame size RO has natural convection cooling Frame sizes R1 R4 are provided with an internal fan The air flow direction is from bottom to top The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and in the control circuit with minimum load I O and panel not in use and maximum load all digital inputs in the on state and the panel fieldbus and fan in use The total heat dissipation
311. responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration Acceleration compensation compensation VA VA t t Speed reference Actual speed 0 00 500 00 EE 2305 AUTOTUNE Start automatic tuning of the speed controller Instructions p Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON Note The motor load must be connected to the motor DN CI Activates the speed controller autotuning The drive accelerates the motor calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation parameter 2307 PROP GAIN 2302 INTEGRATION TIME and 2304 ACC COMPENSATION values Setting is automatically reverted to OFF 2401 TORQ RAMP Defines the torque reference ramp up time ie the minimum UP time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque Actual signals and parameters 231 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2402 TORQ RAMP Defines the torque reference ramp down time ie the DOWN minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero 000 120 005 Time ficos 2501 CRIT SPEED _ Activates deactivates the critical speeds function The S critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz and 46 to 52 Hz To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges
312. reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint MAI Displayed value can be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting Scrolls up through a menu or list Increases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 Control panels 77 B Operation You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the as and amp v arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the N key With the Z key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The basic control panel has five panel modes Output mode Reference mode Parameter mode Copy mode and Fault mode The operation in the first four modes is described in this chap
313. rides the constant speeds Note The jogging uses ramp stop even if parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION selection is COAST Note The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging ie linear ramp Jogging function uses constant speed 7 as jogging speed and acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 It is also possible to activate jogging function 1 or 2 through fieldbus Jogging function 1 uses constant speed 7 and jogging function 2 uses constant speed 6 Both functions use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 B Settings Additional information 1010 Jogging activation 1208 Jogging speed 1208 1207 Jogging speed for jogging function 1 2 activated through fieldbus 2112 Zero speed delay 2205 2206 Acceleration and deceleration times 2207 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time Set to zero during the jogging ie linear ramp E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0302 Jogging 1 2 activation through fieldbus 1401 Jogging function status through RO 1 1402 1403 1410 Jogging function status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Jogging function status through DO Program features 163 Timed functions A variety of drive functions can be time controlled eg start stop and EXT1 EXT2 control The drive offers four start and stop times START TIME 1 START TIME 4 STOP TIME 1 STOP TIME 4 four start and stop days START DAY 1 START DAY 4 STOP DAY 1 STOP DAY 4 four timed
314. rnal fault Current measurement is out of range Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Communication fault between pulse encoder and pulse encoder interface module or between module and drive Check external devices for faults Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 setting Check motor Check motor cable Motor cable length must not exceed maximum specifications See section Motor connection data on page 367 Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may damage drive Check for problem in driven equipment Check fault function parameters Check motor power against drive power Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Check fault function parameters Check pulse encoder and its wiring pulse encoder interface module and its wiring and parameter group 50 ENCODER settings CODE Ed 0027 0028 0029 0030 0034 FAULT LT Lea 7310 0306 bit 7 CONFIG FILE 630F 0306 bit 10 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510 0306 bit 11 programmable fault function 3018 3019 EFB CON FILE 6306 0306 bit 12 FORCE TRIP FF90 0306 bit 13 MOTOR PHASE FF56 0306 bit 14 Fault tracing 347 CAUSE WHAT TO DO Motor is turning faster than hi
315. ro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 6 PID CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 176 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 51 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF B Default I O connections X1A 1 Son Signal cable shield screen O O aad 1 toro l 9 GND Analog input creuit common 7 1 eV Reference voltage 10 V DO max 10mA Deep 45 A2 Process actual value 4 20 MAY max sooch JT ONO Analog input ceut common OPT TPO eet speed vate 9 208 8 GND _ Analog output circuit common fo ev faia votage output 24 V DO max 200 mA i0 GND Auxiliary voltage output common m DCOM Digital input common 12 pr Stop 0 Start Hand X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 18 RONC a No fault Fault 1 8 19 Rono Digital output max 100 mA 21 DOOUT 7 No fault Fault 1 1 Hand 0 10 V gt speed reference sensors supplied by the drive aux voltage PID 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint output see page 53 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 3 The signal source is powered externally See Safe torque off connections X1C STO not the manufacturer s instructions To use shown in the diagram are jumpered by default 118 App
316. roller PID2 PID2 42 EXT TRIM PID can be used in two different ways External controller Instead of using additional PID controller hardware the user can connect PID2 output through drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve e Trim controller PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive See section Reference trimming on page 129 150 Program features E Block diagrams The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID control block diagram Pressure boost pump ret Actual values Frequency reference Speed reference 4014 4021 Alt Al2 IMOT ref 4010 Program features 151 The following figure presents the speed scalar control block diagram for process controller PID1 ELL eL xOLLV OLOV eLOb ZLOp Lp pue Op dnoJB ei z pue 1es Jejeurejed qd Usem aq sioajes z0v J9JQUIEJed cJeJ Jaue y 1oeJos Jeyur 191 Ldld LV OV 90H E kKLoLV vELT LcOr VLOV mo ae ZOLL O tald anjea tdid uonosjes edu UAMS 19 ld ni LOV ININOO JOMOd enbJo Juano IV OdS elv peeds IV 2JeJ eueg 1ooJos J9J c 1X3 luejisuo9 e Ye _ c eo e wa Z peeds jsuoy vOLL peeds eDeJeAy von ZL dnog 0
317. rotating start mode 2 DC MAGN is selected with parameter 2101 START FUNCTION and run is requested Drive warns that rotating motor cannot be magnetized with DC current Check parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1 settings Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings Check parameter 1609 START ENABLE 2 settings Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings Check that it is safe to continue operation Return emergency stop push button to normal position Check pulse encoder and its wiring pulse encoder interface module and its wiring and parameter group 50 ENCODER settings Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Check fault function parameters If start to rotating motor is required select start mode 1 AUTO with parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Otherwise drive starts after motor has stopped 340 Fault tracing CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2035 SAFE TORQUE STO Safe torque off If this was not expected reaction to OFF requested and it safety circuit interruption check 0309 bit 13 functions correctly cabling of safety circuit connected to Parameter 3025 STO STO terminals X1C OPERATION is setto If different reaction is required change react with alarm value of parameter 3025 STO OPERATION Note Start signal must be reset toggled to 0
318. rounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U2 V2 and W2 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 lbf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 3 Connect the optional brake resistor to the BRK and BRK terminals with a shielded cable using the same procedure as for the motor cable in the previous step 4 Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically Ot0 eooooogo D w II Electrical installation 51 Connecting the control cables B O terminals The figure below shows the I O terminals Tightening torque is 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in ATC STO X1A X1B 1234 1 SCR 17 ROCOM 2 Alt 18 RONC 3 GND 19 RONO TUE py 4 10V 20 DOSRC gt 5 Al 21 DOOUT 33 7 AO 8 GND X1C STO 9 24V 1 OUT 10 GND 2 OUT2 11 DCOM 3 IN1 Warning 12 DI 4 IN2 Dangerous voltage POWER o e a ME O 15 DI4 toga O 16 DI5 digital or frequency input FAULT 1 Selects voltage or current as the signal types for analog inputs Al1 and Al2 ra lt lt X1A X1B Voltage and current selection for analog inputs Switch S1 selects voltage 0 2 10 V 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA 20 20 mA as the signal types for analog inputs Al1 and Al2 The
319. rrent parameter 1 1 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE Defines the DC brake time TIME 00 25008 222 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off If the drive is not OFF actively started and running the Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required a fault is reset Run enable signal activates while the start command is active See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE control mode changes from local to remote external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or from EXT2 to EXT1 OFF Dewe ON Enable 2109 EMERG STOP Selects the source for the external emergency stop S command The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop command is reset Note The installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing the stop key on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential Emergency stop function is not selected Digital input DI1 1 stop along the emergency stop ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 emergency stop command reset Inverted digital input DI O stop along the emergency stop ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 1 emergency stop command reset DIANV 2110 TORQ BOOST Defi
320. rted digital input DI1 O ramp input is forced to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 2301 PROP GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller High gain 5 00 may cause speed oscillation The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant T Integration time 0 Error Tp Derivation time 0 PN Ww dd output e Error output value Kp t Note For automatic setting of the gain use autotune run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Def FbEq 228 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value 2302 INTEGRATION TIME Description Def FbEq Defines an integration time for the speed controller The 0 50 s integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output Gain Kp 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value t Note For automatic setting of the integration time use autotune run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN S fiar Actual signals and parameters 229 All parameters No Name Value Description D
321. s Alternate macro This macro provides an I O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 ALTERNATE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 176 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 51 B Default I O connections X1A EL js JGND Analog input cout commen LS tov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 m 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA AO o E ES pan sta volage cla 124 VO mac mA Tro Jeno Avni volage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 72 Dit Starttorwara Dit DE he dive stops X1B 47 ROCOM ee Loe DOSPE y Digital output max 100 mA 8j DooUT L p No fault Fault 1 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters 0 O Set speed through Al1 2205 and 2206 11 o Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp O t Speed 2 1203 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 lbf in Speed 3 1204 Safe torque off connections X1C STO not shown in the diagram are jumpered by defa
322. s The actual life soan depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature Automatic fan on off control increases the life span see parameter 1612 FAN CONTROL When the assistant control panel is in use the Notice handler assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG This information can also be passed to the relay output see group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS regardless of the used panel type Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts E Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 Only frame sizes R1 R4 include a fan frame size RO has natural cooling f WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 17 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the AC power source 2 Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option 3 Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver and lift the hinged fan holder slightly upward from its front edge 4 Free the fan cable from the clip 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Remove the fan holder from the hinges a 6 er SS O Msz a 1
323. s or motor Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient due to missing input power line phase blown fuse rectifier bridge internal fault or too low input power Analog input Al1 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Analog input Al2 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Check motor load Check acceleration time 2202 and 2205 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 359 Check that overvoltage controller is on parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Check input power line for static or transient overvoltage Check brake chopper and resistor if used DC overvoltage control must be deactivated when brake chopper and resistor is used Check deceleration time 2203 2206 Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor Check ambient conditions See also section Derating on page 359 Check air flow and fan operation Check motor power against drive power Check motor and motor cable Check that undervoltage controller is on parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Check input power supply and fuses Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper a
324. s relay output RO control by signal 0134 1501 AO1 CONTENT 1135 ie 0135 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference 0135 1601 RUN ENABLE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Run enable signal Run disable Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 329 Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control 1604 FAULT RESET COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for AA POM aM 1606 LOCAL LOCK COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock signal 1607 PARAM SAVE DONE Saves parameter value changes including SAVE those made through fieldbus control to the permanent memory 1608 START COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for ENABLE 1 the inverted Start enable 1 Start disable signal 1609 START COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for ENABLE 2 the inverted Start enable 2 Start disable signal 2013 MIN TORQUE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for pue REN OONM fie minimum orgue Irt VA sekecon 2014 MAX TORQUE COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for put ge TORN OONM rr 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for SEL acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 2 selection 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 COMM Selects the fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS 3018 COMM FAULT NOT SEL Determines the drive action in case the fieldbus FAUL
325. sed through both EXT1 and EXT2 The Control word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS whichever control location is active is set to COMM 316 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Control word The table below and the state diagram on page 379 describe the Control word content for the ABB drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the diagram ABB drives profile Control word parameter 5379 EFB PAR 19 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE Stop along currently active deceleration ramp 2203 2206 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Enter OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON OFF3 CONTROL 1 unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active INHIBIT Continue operation OFF2 inactive Emergency OFF drive coast to stop Enter OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED OPERATION Continue operation OFFS inactive Emergency stop drive stops within time defined by par 2208 Enter OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run enable signal must be active see parameter 1601 If par 1601 is set to COMM this bit also activates the Run enable signal Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile RAMP_OUT_ 1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ZERO ENABLED ABB DAV FULL Fo
326. seeeeeeea a ee CUR 311 Actual value ScalFft sisas adonde cube aad edd de es dd Papeete dae 311 Modbus mapping ess ceseevcvescdaeueuseee seas AE AR 312 Register mapping ugar aor SO ad 312 FUNCION Codes i2 pSAR EI Rd ES Ped bread ar iius 314 Exception codes ionem 4st EE lp EIE TUE REUS Sp san leader edits 314 Communication profiles x cos pedo euo E REN Ee RO Red RO Oe bed due dee e E na g 315 ABB drives communication profile c 2sk ek aoc ERR rd vee bewwe ys 315 DCU communication profile 42 e eR REG RR ws bbs DKL EE E 320 14 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains 22 00 coveted xA AAA 325 System DVOEVIBIW v za EORR Eu e EO edite bo et oa th hee de eee 325 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module 327 Drive control parameters s s ese ERES RR RERERRIE3GORA RR be EX GUERRE RR Ra s 328 Fieldbus control interface ups ace x odore ocio Kobe dh eh ok bo edo RO alc d Rb cabe 330 Control word and Status word 2 iu 22i ux ex pibe REP ORE Rd etui dob PEE R edd 330 lige PCT 331 ACA Vall s sortes Ro cde cu e Dc eod ORC s RR Sw GR d ii 331 Gomm nication Profile sastera niin ua anae iea a a aE ETARE E 331 Fieldbus references src ddr a barra ta dees 332 Reference selection and correction ooooooocononornererr ee 332 Fieldbus reference Scallfitf orar ladrar datada PO a ed dud 334 Reference handling 1 ka pen Ecke ERR RR USADO UE EFE RE ES ter ease 334 Ac
327. selection SCAN START If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR SPEED or VECTOR TORQ the drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME See selection DC MAGN For permanent magnet motors flying start is used if the motor is rotating DC MAGN The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR SPEED or VECTOR TORQ DC magnetizing guarantees the highest possible break away torque when the pre magnetizing is set long enough Note Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not possible when DC MAGN is selected When a permanent magnet motor is used alarm MOTOR BACK EMF 2029 is generated WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed even if the motor magnetization is not completed In applications where a full break away torque is essential always ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque Actual signals and parameters 219 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break away torque is required Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the
328. sent an A indicates a decimal point eg 9A7 means 9 7 A he Y 9 200 V EXI 00 00 4 400 V i i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys A and Cv Press to return to the Par backup menu E I O settings mode In the I O settings mode you can e check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal Control panels 107 edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value A 1 you can change its value to eg A 2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1706 REF2 SELECT to Al1 Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Sem ay Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly ES until you get to the Main menu Go to the I O settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys as and SY 7 and pressing Select the I O group eg DIGITAL INPUTS with keys C A and amp Y 7 and press After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the selection keys A and S Y 2 and press NI Specify a new value for the setting with keys A and ANCUS Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the va
329. ses over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it into ohms The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature THERM 0 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive through a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a digital input O motor overtemperature THERM 1 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive through a normally open thermistor relay connected to a digital input 1 motor overtemperature 3502 INPUT Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement A 7 Analog input Al1 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Digital input DI1 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 Digital input DI2 Used when parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 4 5 Al2 Analog input Al2 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is 2 selected for the temperature measurement 258 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Digital input DI3 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 Digital input DI4 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set
330. sor Three sensors WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature A sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement the I O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals 156 Program features It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor relay between the 24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive anda digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 or THERM 1 Thermistor WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input B Settings Parameter Additional information Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output settings Group
331. ssing x7 1 PAR F WD LOC 1 PAR FWD If you want to monitor actual values during the ID run go to the Output mode by pressing 7 repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run However you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID run is completed the alarm display is Loc not shown any more If the ID run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save SAVE the new setting by pressing lt 9910 1D RUN 1 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE If you want to monitor actual values during the ID EXIT run go to the Output mode by pressing tz repeatedly until you get there 0 DIR 00 00 MENU Press lt gt to start the ID run The panel keeps LOC ALARM switching between the display that was shown when you started the run Run and the alarm ALARM 2019 display presented on the right ID RUN 00 00 In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run However you can stop the ID run at any time by pressing CQ Start up control with O and ID run 71 After the ID run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the 1D run fails the fault display prese
332. start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Torque boost is applied at start Torque boost is stopped when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to the reference value See parameter 2770 TORQ BOOST CURR Note Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not possible when TORQ BOOST is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed In applications where a full break away torque is essential always ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start starting the drive connected to a rotating motor Based on frequency scanning interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ to identify the frequency If frequency identification fails DC magnetization is used see selection DC MAGN SCAN Combines scanning start starting the drive connected to a BOOST rotating motor and torque boost See selections SCAN START and TORQ BOOST If frequency identification fails torque boost is used Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function FUNCTION COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply The motor 1 coasts to stop RAMP Stop along a ramp See parameter group 22 2 ACCEL DECEL SPEED COMP Speed compensation is used for constant
333. switch between torque and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for torque control others for speed control One digital input selects between torque and speed control The user can save the customized standard macro ie the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time For example three user macros can be used when switching between three different motors is required Application macros 111 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros The following table gives the summary of the default I O connections of all application macros ipu Maro output App Alternate Motor Hand Auto PID Torque standard potentiom control control Alt Freq ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref 0 10 V Hand Hand Speed Proc ref PID Al2 Speed ref Process Torque 0 20 mA Auto value ref Torque Output Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed freq Stop Start Start Start fwd Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start pulse Hand Hand Speed Fwd Rev Stop Start rev Fwd Rev Fwd Rev Hand PID Fwd Rev pulse Hand Speed ref Fwd Rev Run Const down Auto enable speed 1 Ramp pair Ramp pair Const Stop Start Stop Start Ramp pair selection selection speed 1 Auto PID selection Fwd Rev Speed ref Hand Auto Const
334. ta to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys CANCI and press lt j to accept and continue with the Start up assistant EXIT Note At any time if you press 7 the Start up assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode The basic start up is now completed However it REM wCHOICE might be useful at this stage to set the parameters Do you want to required by your application and continue with the application setup application set up as suggested by the Start up assistant EXIT 100 00 SAVE ip EXIT 1 00 OK Start up control with I O and ID run 67 Select the application macro according to which the REM_uUPAR EDIT control cables are connected 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD EXT 00 00 SAVE EM wCHOI CE 0 on want to ontinue with XT1 reference setup Continue with the application set up After completing R a set up task the Start up assistant suggests the next i one E Press amp when is highlighted to p continue with the suggested task EXIT 100 00 OK _ Press key v to highlight and then press lt lt to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press 7 to stop the Start up assistant Press key to switch to local control LOC shown on the left If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by press
335. table of the default values for the different macros Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible Groups 01 04 contain actual signals Parameter default value Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Groups 10 99 contain parameters Note Parameter selections are shown on the basic control panel as integer values Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as value 10 which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value and the integer used in serial communication FbEq Refers to types 01E and 03E with European parametrization Refers to types 01U and 03U with US parametrization Fieldbus addresses For FCAN 01 CANopen adapter FDNA 01 DeviceNet adapter FECA 01 EtherCAT adapter FENA 01 Ethernet adapter FMBA 01 Modbus adapter FLON 01 LonWorks adapter and FPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP adapter see the user s manual of the adapter 176 Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus equivalent Example If 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 see page 217 is set from an external control system an integer value of 1000 corresponds to 100 0 All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits 32768 32767 Default values with different macros When application macro is changed parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the software updates the parameter values to their default v
336. tenance and hardware diagnostics page 353 contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Technical data page 357 contains technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Dimension drawings page 379 shows dimension drawings of the drive Appendix Resistor braking page 389 tells how to select the brake resistor Appendix Extension modules page 393 describes the MPOW 01 auxiliary power extension module It mentions the MREL 01 relay output extension module and MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module briefly readers are referred to the corresponding user s manual Appendix Safe torque off STO page 399 describes STO features installation and technical data e Further information inside of the back cover page 405 tells how to make product and service inquiries get information on product training provide feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet Related documents See List of related manuals on page 2 inside of the front cover Categorization by frame size The ACS355 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 To identify the frame size of your drive see the table in section Ratings on page 358 24 Introduction t
337. tension module The adapter of the MPOW 01 is already fixed to the extension module at the factory Gently and firmly install the extension module to the drive s panel slot directly from the front Note Signal and power connections to the drive are automatically made through a 6 pin connector Appendix Extension modules 395 6 Ground the extension module by inserting the screw removed from the drive in the top left corner of the extension module Tighten the screw using a torque of 0 8 N m 7 lbf in Note Correct insertion and tightening of the screw is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and proper operation of the extension module 7 Install the control panel or panel cover on the extension module 8 Electrical installation is module specific For MPOW 01 see section Electrical installation on page 397 For MTAC 01 see MTAC 01 pulse encoder interface module user s manual 3AFE68591091 English and for MREL 01 see MREL 01 relay output extension module user s manual 3AUA0000035957 English 396 Appendix Extension modules B Technical data Dimensions Extension module dimensions are shown in the figure below 64 2 52 45 1 m
338. ter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 335 After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the PREM 4 0 1 Hz direction switch between local and remote control and OUTPUT F WD monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task e Page How 10 browse the monitored signas foun Howto copy parameters rom the drive to the control pane Copy 86 How o restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 86 78 Control panels How to find out the panel firmware version If the power is switched on switch it off Po Keep key amp 9 pressed down while you switch on the X X X power and read the panel firmware version shown on the display When you release the EN key the panel goes to the Output mode How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control step
339. ter 8422 8452 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 171 Sequence counter signal 0177 SEQ CYCLE CNTR supervision 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 30 Supervision low limit 3 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 0 Supervision high limit 8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE EXT2 Sequence programming enabled 8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input DI1 8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1 INV Sequence programming reset ie reset to state 1 when DI1 signal is lost 1 gt 0 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 D Logic value 1 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 AND Operation between logic value 1 and 2 14 8408 SEQ LOGIC VAL 2 Logic value 2 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC ST5 TO NEXT Sequence counter activation ie sequence count increases every time the state changes from state 5 to state 6 8416 CYCLE CNT RST STATE 1 Sequence counter reset during state transition to state 1 Program features 173 ST1 pa Betta y Par Setting Par Setting information 8420 ST1 REF 50 8430 65 8440 60 8450 35 State SEL reference 0 8421 ST1 START 8431 START 8441 START 8451 START Run direction COMMANDS FRW FRW FRW FRW and stop commands 8422 ST1 8432 1 5s 8442 0 s 8452 1 5s Acceleration HAMP deceleration ramp time 8423 ST1 OUT R 0 D 0 8433 AO 0 8443 AO 0 8453 AO 0 Re
340. th different macros on page 176 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 51 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF B Default I O connections X1A LL S8 Sana cable siea scree ee torons a 1 fa GND Analog input circuit common Er 4 10V Reference votage 110V DO max TOMA Dees a2 Motor speed reference Auto 0 20 mA son JT E ONO Anal iputicutcommon 2 Io Wee ent ek S GND Analog output circuit common ao pev run votago ouput 24 V DO max HA o GND Auxiiary voltage output common w DCOM Digital input common Fe om Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B E Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 19 RONO zo posRC Digital output max 100 mA 9 7 pour No fault Fault 1 1 360 degree grounding under a clamp Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 2 The signal source is powered externally See Safe torque off connections X1C STO not the manufacturer s instructions To use shown in the diagram are jumpered by default sensors supplied by the drive aux voltage output see page 53 Application macros 117 PID control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the mac
341. th drive restoring error 5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload 5051 Contact your local ABB representative 5052 Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload failed 5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download aborted 5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download failed 5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative write error 5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative read error 5080 Operation is not allowed Switch to local control mode because drive is not in local control mode 5081 Operation is not allowed Check cause of fault and reset fault because of active fault 5083 Operation is not allowed Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK because parameter lock is setting on 5084 Operation is not allowed Wait until task is completed and retry because drive is performing a task 5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types source to destination drive are same ie ACS355 See type designation has failed label of the drive 5086 arameter download from Check that source and destination drive type source to destination drive designations are the same See type has failed designation labels of the drives Perform upload function before download Perform upload function before download Fault tracing 343 ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5087 Parameter download from Check that source and destination dr
342. than state change to the next state 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 N 8427 ST1 STATEN Defines the state N See parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST STATE 1 STATE STATE STATE 3 STATE 4 STATES STATE 6 SIWE7 State 7 STATES 430 ST2 REF SEL See parameters 8420 8427 497 ST8 STATEN 294 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 9802 COMM PROT Activates the external serial communication and selects the NOT SEL EL interface NOTSEL No communication O STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface EIA 485 provided by optional 1 FMBA 01 Modbus adapter connected to drive terminal X3 See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 301 The drive communicates through a fieldbus adapter module 4 connected to drive terminal X3 See also parameter group 51 EXT COMM MODULE See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 232 ie control panel 10 RS232 connector See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter on page 325 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language used on the assistant control panel Note With the ACS CP D assistant control panel the following languages are available English 0 Chinese 1 Korean 2 and Japanese 3 ENGLISH ENGLISH AN DEUTSCH FTALIANO ESPANOL PORTUGUES NEDERLANDS FRANCAIS French y DANSK SUOMI SVENSKA RUS
343. that the drive is in remote control Press key In remote control the panel to switch between remote and local control display shows text REM Start by switching digital input DI1 on Basic control panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Assistant control panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Al1 Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on D REM Hz OUTPUT REV Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off 5 REM Hz OUTPUT F WD Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Basic control panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly Assistant control panel The arrow stops rotating Start up control with O and ID run 69 How to perform the ID run The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 OFF IDMAGN In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID run The ID run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback ie
344. the ACS355 are shown below The dimensions are given in millimeters and inches 380 Dimension drawings Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open H1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 Frame sizes RO and H1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open qms 7 ER e OO amp C HA 1 Extension modules add 26 mm 1 02 in to the depth measure 3AUA0000067784 A Dimension drawings 381 Frame sizes RO and H1 IP20 NEMA 1 R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 T Cx a 1 x Y u EN SY oO nm S e xe T e z e c c My e O V Y a P o 0 E N c Y T az ab th 9 E Y 0 Xx m o Oo c ca T E 227 ER T s N e 2 E E gt o A Lo c o ES ay o 2 3 t og e co N db 5 8 e 5 8 C o o o 2 4 5 l Mem lt x o5 382 Dimension drawings Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 35 mm rail YY IN an Y Y JN 8 S js Er p ooo o c 3 oe IE re Extension modul
345. the digital inputs is 2 ms One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 133 B Settings Parameter Group 10 START STOP DIR Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS Dl as external Run enable fault reset or user macro change signal Group 19 TIMER amp COUNTER Dl as timer or counter control signal source 4 Dl as torque limit source 2109 Dl as external emergency stop command source 2201 Dl as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 401041104210 Group 84 SEQUENCE PROG DI as Sequence programming control signal source E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0160 DI status 0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred Program features 133 Programmable relay output The drive has one programmable relay output It is possible to add three additional relay outputs with the optional MREL 01 relay output extension module For more information see MREL 01 relay output extension module user s manual 8AUA0000035974 English With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc The update time for the relay output is 2 ms A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link B Settings Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times 8423 RO c
346. the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 320 and ABB drives communication profile on page 315 External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Run enable If Run enable signal is switched on the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running See selection D 1 INV See selection D 1 INV 2 4 See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 1602 PARAMETER Selects the state of the parameter lock The lock prevents OPEN LOCK parameter changing from the control panel LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 1603 PASS CODE The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by macros or fieldbus OPEN The lock is open Parameter values can be changed 1 gc 204 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description NOT SAVED Parameter changes from the control panel are not stored into the permanent memory To store changed parameter values set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE 1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock see parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 65535 Pass code Setting 358 opens the lock The value reverts 1 1 back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET Selects the source for the fault reset signal T
347. the fieldbus controller through the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 320 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile Local lock through inverted digital input DI1 Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control allowed Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control disabled DIANV 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory Note A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection DONE Saving completed 2 o i JN IT Actual signals and parameters 207 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq SAVE Saving in progress 1608 START Selects the source for the Start enable 1 signal NOT SEL ENABLE Note Functionality of the Start enable signal is different from the Run enable signal Example External damper control application using Start enable and Run enable Motor can start only after the damper is fully open Drive started Start Stop command group 10 Start enable signals 1608 and 1609 Relay energized Started Relay de output status en rgized group 14 Damper open Damper Damper closed closed Damper m status Damper opening closing time Run enable signal rom the damper end Switch when the damper is fully
348. third frequency point of the custom U f curve 25 0 Hz DEFINED F3 00 8000H2 Foge i2 2616 USER Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve at 7696 of DEFINED U4 the frequency defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED UN F4 See section Custom U f ratio on page 141 0 120 of Uy V Voltage l 1 Y 2617 USER Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 40 0 Hz DEFINED F4 0 0 500 0 Hz E 2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal 95 of to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR Un NOM FREQ See section Custom U f ratio on page 141 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2619 DC Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC DISABLE STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation DISABLE Disabled ENABLE Enabled 1 e zE N L N ll lt Actual signals and parameters 237 All parameters No Name Value Description 2621 SMOOTH Selects the forced current vector rotation mode at low START speeds When the smooth start mode is selected the rate of acceleration is limited by the acceleration and deceleration ramp times parameters 2202 and 2203 If the process driv
349. tive Dl OB D4 INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV DI1 INV The function is activated deactivated through inverted digital 1 input DI1 1 deactivation 0 activation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective DEUNV See selecion Dony ovy See selection ona DANY SeeseecionDUNV Div See selection OTN DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 I5 Actual signals and parameters 269 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4023 PID SLEEP Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor 0 0 Hz LEVEL speed is below a set level 4023 longer than the sleep 0 rpm delay 4024 the drive shifts to the sleeping mode The motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm message PID SLEEP 2018 Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to INTERNAL PID process feedback Wake up delay 4026 Wake up level ref deviation 4025 PID output level Control tg Sleep dela s 024 p y panel t lt i u 4024 PID SLEEP Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter DELAY 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the
350. to THERM 0 THERM 1 DI5 Digital input DI5 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR 7 TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement Alarm MOTOR TEMP 2010 indication is given when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 1 alarm 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature measurement The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP 0009 when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 1 fault 3505 AO Enables current feed from analog output AO Parameter DISABLE EXCITATION setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings With PTC the output current is 1 6 mA With Pt 100 the output current is 9 1 mA DISABLE Disabled O0 ENABLE Enabled 3601 TIMERS Selects the source for the timed function enable signal NOT SEL ENABLE NOT SEL Timed function is not selected D o Digital input DI Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 falling aude of DI1 NV See selection DIN k DIQNV See selection DIV k AIN SeeseecionDI INV 4 DSIN SeeseleionDIWINV f Actual signals and parameters 259 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1 The time can be changed in 00 00 00 2 second steps 00 00 00 h
351. to state 6 Counter is reset when the state has been reached 7 10 11 Actual signals and parameters 287 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq STATE 7 Reset during state transition to state 7 Counter is reset 12 when the state has been reached STATE 8 Reset during state transition to state 8 Counter is reset 18 when the state has been reached SEQ PROG Reset signal source defined by parameter 8404 SEQ PROG 14 8420 ST1 REF SEL Selects the source for the Sequence programming state 1 0 0 reference Parameter is used when parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to SEQ PROG Al1 SEQ PROG Al2 SEQ PROG Note Constant speeds in group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS overwrite the selected Sequence programming reference COMM 0136 COMM VALUE 2 For scaling see Fieldbus reference 1 3 scaling on page 310 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation i a REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 DI4U 5D Digital input DI4 Reference increase Digital input DI5 BRL Reference decrease DISU 4D Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease DI3U 4DR Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14
352. tput DO is activated If Sequence programming is deactivated by the falling edge of digital input DI1 state machine is reset to state 1 New start command can be activated by digital input DI1 or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be simultaneously active ST8 error state Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1 Relay output RO is activated If Sequence programming is deactivated by the falling edge of digital input DI1 state machine is reset to state 1 New start command can be activated by digital input DI1 or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be simultaneously active 1 O second ramp time drive is accelerated decelerated as rapidly as possible 2 State reference must be between 0 1 00 ie scaled Al1 value must be between 15 85 If Al1 0 reference 0 35 50 15 lt 0 172 Program features Parameter Setting Additional information 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start stop direction commands for EXT2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation 1106 REF2 SELECT Al1 SEQ Sequence programming output as REF2 PROG 1201 CONST SPEED SEL NOT SEL Deactivation of constant speeds 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 SEQ PROG Relay output RO 1 control as defined by parameter 8423 8493 1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run enable 1805 DO SIGNAL SEQ PROG Digital output DO control as defined by parameter 8423 8493 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parame
353. trical installation Wiring Use 0 5 1 5 mm 20 16 AWG shielded cable Connect the control wires according to the diagram in section Terminal designations below Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in Terminal designations The diagram below shows the MPOW 01 terminals and how the MPOW 01 module is connected to the external power supply and how the modules are daisy chained External MPOW 01 power supply 24 V DC or 24 V AC 10 Terminal SCR is internally connected to the analog ground AGND of the All terminals are connected together inside the module allowing daisy chaining of the signals Next MPOW 01 398 Appendix Extension modules B Technical data Specifications Input voltage 24 V DC or 24 V AC 10 Maximum load 1200 mA rms Power losses with maximum load 6 W Designed lifetime of the MPOW 01 module is 50 000 hours in the specified ambient conditions of the drive see section Ambient conditions on page 371 Appendix Safe torque off STO 399 Appendix Safe torque off STO What this appendix contains The appendix describes the basics of the Safe torque off function STO for the ACS355 In addition application features and technical data for the safety system calculation are presented Basics The drive supports the Safe torque off STO function according to standards EN 61800 5 2 EN ISO 13849 1 2006 IEC EN 60204 1 1997 EN 61508 2002 EN 1037 1996 and
354. trol How to view faults Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR EXIT 1490709 ENTER Go to the Fault logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with keys 45 and SY 7 and ENTER pressing 3 The display shows the fault log starting with the latest fault The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing on page 335 To see the details of a fault select it with keys A and Y and press S To show the help text press ul Scroll the help text with keys A and SY After reading the help press lt to return to the previous display 102 Control panels E Time and date mode In the Time and date mode you can e show or hide the clock change date and time display formats setthe date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The assistant control panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes LOL ey NN MEN Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output
355. tual value scaling 2 259 dom ce hee RE SHEE Le ET ERES paa 334 15 Fault tracing What this chapter contains iun d V bee eyed edd a ORE RR Red 335 sl en 335 Alarm and Tat desi ol s s oes eo eee eee eee OER eee eee aa eee ERO 335 How to reset sani ienna epee ake desde ha e ocd ete eck Soo ae So oa 335 a E 222422 ecetee hese nSeteteladp ELT 336 Alarm messages generated by the drive cece eee tees 337 Alarms generated by the basic control panel 0 200 eee 341 Fault messages generated by the drive 0 cee es 344 Embedded fieldbus faults s cc dea rar Rd ORG X NL E ER a we des 352 No master device 6 sce xus X te RU RC b qc aote 352 Same deve ddl SS i deesse bara riada d deos 352 esequi TERT TUTTI 352 Table of contents 13 16 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains issue exe bead Pee e ees e a ees 353 Maintenance intervals aate nacen cada diria ede aia 353 CODINA fan lt n 2 bese ee ened eee a EA eR AE RA ed oe 354 Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 2 ee 354 Capacitors qm Pc X es ls Hee Poe eked ee eee eek ES 355 Reforming the capacitors oc ecssss scscvea sea Fs DELE Fux XR ae d Ee E 355 Power connections sue ee sete me RR Sees Rae eee ada s 355 Control pa ellss cs ceperit Sew eee eee eee ee Seah eee ee eee Ni ed eee ee eee wes 356 Cleaning the controlpanel corra toi a eed bebe ES PEXES PR 356 Changing the battery in the assistant
356. ty of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety related electrical electronic and programmable electronic control systems Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 2 Safety requirements Functional UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition Technical data 373 CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Compliance with the European EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives See section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 373 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 E Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equi
357. uctor size Tightening torque Min Max Min Max m AWG Ibf in 025 15 24118 Technical data 367 Electric power network specification Voltage U4 200 208 220 230 240 V AC 1 phase for 200 V AC drives 200 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase for 200 V AC drives 380 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase for 400 V AC drives 10 variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default Short circuit capacity Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 and UL 508C is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage Frequency 50 60 Hz 5 maximum rate of change 17 s Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Motor connection data Motor type Asynchronous induction motor or synchronous permanent magnet motor Voltage U3 0 to U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Short circuit protection The motor output is short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 and IEC 61800 5 1 UL 508C UL 508C Frequency 0 600 Hz Frequency resolution 0 01 Hz Current See section Ratings on page 358 Power limit 1 5 PN Field weakening point 10 600 Hz Switching frequency 4 8 12 or 16 kHz in scalar control Speed control See section Speed control performance figures on page 143 Torque control See section Torque control performance figures on page 14
358. ue STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON uM NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE Pa OFF1 ACTIVE RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED NE OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 OFF_2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive ce OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBITED PA Switch on inhibit not active ALARM 1 Alarm See chapter Fault tracing on page 335 318 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus ABB drives profile EFB Status word parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals reference value is within tolerance limits ie in speed control the difference between the output speed and the speed reference is less than or equal to 4 196 of the nominal motor speed Asymmetric hysteresis 4 when speed enters the reference area 196 when speed exits the reference area Actual value differs from reference value 2 is outside tolerance limits REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until
359. uipment WARNING Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is A rotating Also when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped a rotating permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the supply connections become live Before installation and maintenance work on the drive Stop the motor Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals according to step 1 or 2 or if possible according to the both steps 1 Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals Ut V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK BRK 2 Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work Make sure that no other system like hydraulic crawling drives is able to rotate the motor directly or through any mechanical connection like felt nip rope etc Measure that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK BRK Ground the drive output terminals temporarily by N connecting them together as well as to the PE B General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment The drive is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for replacement Make sure that dust from drilling d
360. ult Application macros 115 Motor potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 4 MOTOR POT For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 176 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 51 B Default I O connections X1A 6 GND Analog input circuit common OE FAL A0 Motor speed value O 20 mA 23 18 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DO max 200 mA X1B 17 ROCOM nefron 8 E 1 f DI and DIA are both active or inactive the 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp speed reference is unchanged Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in The existing speed reference is stored Safe torque off connections X1C STO not during stop and power down shown in the diagram are jumpered by default Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 116 Application macros Hand Auto macro This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is needed To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 5 HAND AUTO For the parameter default values see section Default values wi
361. ult DC UNDERVOLT 0006 after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Inactive CON 3107 AR AI MIN Activates deactivates the automatic reset for Al lt MIN DISABLE analog input signal under the allowed minimum level faults Al1 LOSS 0007 and Al2 LOSS 0008 Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE ENABLE Active 1 WARNING The drive may restart even after a long A stop if the analog input signal is restored Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger 3108 AREXTERNAL Activates deactivates the automatic reset for faults EXT DISABLE FLT FAULT 1 0014 and EXT FAULT 2 0015 Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME o DISABLE 248 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3201 SUPERV 1 Selects the first supervised signal Supervision limits are 103 PARAM defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Example 1 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Case B 1407 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay energizes w
362. ult is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant control panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink 66 Start up control with I O and ID run B How to perform a guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the assistant control panel Guided start up is applicable to AC induction motors Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use the Start up assistant Press X when is highlighted to run the Start up assistant EXIT Press 7 if you do not want to run the Start up assistant Press key SY to highlight Ill and then press lt s if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the Start up assistant again the next time you switch on the power to the drive 0 EXIT 100 0 C OK If you decided to run the Start up assistant the REM OPAR EDIT display then asks you to select the language Scroll to 550 LANGUAGE the desired language with keys a v 2 and press ENGLI SH SAVE lt q to accept 0 If you press 7 the Start up assistant is stopped EE aN The Start up assistant now guides you through the REM OPAR EDIT set up tasks starting with the motor set up Set the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT motor da
363. unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do Check the RS 232 EIA 485 interface connection Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 353 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Reforming of capacitors Every year when See Capacitors on page 355 stored Check of dustiness corrosion Every year and temperature Replacement of the cooling fan Every three years See Cooling fan on page 354 frame sizes R1 R4 Check and tightening of the Every six years See Power connections on page 355 power terminals Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Changing the battery in the the assistant control panel assistant control panel on page 356 Testing of Safe torque off STO Every year See Appendix Safe torque off STO operation and reaction on page 399 Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to http www abb com drives and select Drive Services Maintenance and Field Services 354 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Cooling fan The drive s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hour
364. unction XOR 8410 SEQLOGIC See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 NOT SEL VAL 3 See parameter 8406 8411 SEQ VAL 1 Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 0 096 HIGH 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2is set to eg Al 1 HIGH 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 x lt 1 0 8412 SEQ VAL 1 Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 0 0 OW 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2is set to eg Al 1 LOW 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 0 8413 SEQ VAL 2 Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 0 0 HIGH 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2is set to eg Al 2 HIGH 1 0 4 196 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 8414 SEQ VAL 2 Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 0 LOW 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2is set to eg Al 2 LOW 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 2 0 196 8415 CYCLE CNT _ Activates the cycle counter for Sequence programming NOT SEL LOC Example When parameter is set to S76 TO NEXT the cycle count 0171 SEQ CYCLE CNTR increases every time the state changes from state 6 to state 7 NOTSEL STI TO NEXT ST2 TO NEXT ST3 TO NEXT ST4 TO NEXT ST5 TO NEXT STO TO NEXT ST7TONEXT From sate 7 toste y STO TO NEXT 286 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ST1 TON From state 1 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N ST2 TON From state 2 to state n State n is defined by parameter 10 8427 ST1 STATE N ST3 TON From
365. using the appropriate stopping mode before using this function Note Permanent magnet motor drives in case of a multiple IGBT power semiconductor failure In spite of the activation of the STO function the drive system can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates the motor shaft by 180 p degrees where p denotes the pole pair number Program features settings and diagnostics Operation of the STO function and its diagnostics function When both STO inputs are energized the STO function is in the standby state and the drive operates normally If either of the STO inputs is de energized the STO function awakes stops the drive and disables start Start is possible only after the Appendix Safe torque off STO 401 STO inputs have been energized and any of the drive reactions have been reset Drive event can be parametrized according to the table below Parameter Selection values Explanation 3025 STO 1 ONLY FAULT Drive event on successful STO operation is fault OPERATION SAFE TORQUE OFF The fault bit is updated 2 ALARM amp FAULT Drive event on successful STO operation is alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF when stopped and fault SAFE TORQUE OFF when running Fault and alarm bits are updated 3 NO amp FAULT Drive event on successful STO operation is no alarm when stopped and fault SAFE TORQUE OFF when running The fault bit is updated Default Drive event on successful STO operation is alarm 4 ONLY ALARM SAFE
366. ut an external EMC filter Note 3 Category C1 with conducted emissions only Radiated emissions are not compatible when measured with standard emission measurement setup and should be checked or measured on cabinet and machine installations case by case Control connection data Analog inputs X1A 2 and 5 Al1 and Al2 Analog output X1A 7 AO Auxiliary voltage X1A 9 Digital inputs X1A 12 16 DI1 DI5 Frequency input X1A 16 DI5 Relay output X1B 17 19 RO 1 Digital output X1B 20 21 DO Frequency output X1B 20 21 FO STO interface X1C 23 26 Voltage signal unipolar bipolar Current signal unipolar bipolar Potentiometer reference value X1A 4 Resolution Accuracy Voltage Type Input impedance X1A 12 15 X1A 16 Technical data 369 0 2 10 V Rin 675 kohm 10 10 V Rin 675 kohm 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 10 V 196 max 10 mA R lt 10 kohm 0 196 2 0 4 20 mA load lt 500 ohm 24 V DC 10 max 200 mA 12 24 V DC with internal or external supply Max voltage for digital inputs 30 V DC PNP and NPN Rin 2 kohm Rin 4 kohm X1A 16 can be used either as a digital or as a frequency input Frequency Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Max continuous current Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Frequency Resolution Accuracy Pulse train 0 10 kH
367. ve J402 MPOT 01 potentiometer K451 FDNA 01 DeviceNet Extension modules K454 FPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP G406 MPOW 01 auxiliary power module K457 FCAN 01 CANopen L502 MTAC 01 pulse encoder module K458 FMBA 01 Modbus RTU L511 MREL 01 relay output module K466 FENA 01 EtherNet IP Modbus TCP IP K452 FLON 01 LonWorks 1 The ACS355 is compatible with panels that have the following panel revisions and panel firmware versions To find out the revision and firmware version of your panel see page 74 Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware version Basic control panel ACS CP C 1 13 or later Assistant control panel ACS CP A 2 04 or later Assistant control panel Asia ACS CP D 2 04 or later Note that unlike the other panels the ACS CP D is ordered with a separate material code 30 Operation principle and hardware description Mechanical installation 31 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Checking the installation site The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet Check the enclosure requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations see chapter Technical data on page 357 The drive can be installed in three different ways depending on the frame size a back mounting all frame sizes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 c DI
368. ve device serial line port must be initialized and restarted and all of its communication 10 16 17 23 Registers operation E Register mapping The drive parameters Control Status word references and actual values are mapped to the area 4xxxx so that e 40001 40099 are reserved for drive control status reference and actual values 40101 49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101 9999 eg 40102 is parameter 0102 In this mapping the thousands and hundreds correspond to the Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 313 group number while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller See Exception codes on page 374 The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses 40001 40012 and 40031 40034 Modbus register 0001 Control word Control word Supported only by the ABB drives profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal format 4 40002 Reference 1 R W External reference REF1 See section Fieldbus references on page 308 40003 Reference 2 WwW External reference REF2 See section Fieldbus references on page 308 40004 4 shows a copy o
369. vice contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field Contact us ABB Oy Drives P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 www abb com drives ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Fax 262 780 5135 www abb com drives 3 AUAQOONO4A1 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone www abb com drives ASA Power and productivity for a better world 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 3AUA0000066143 Rev A EN EFFECTIVE 2010 01 01 AA ED ED FADED
370. w E Changing the battery in the assistant control panel A battery is only used in assistant control panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions except the clock LEDs There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive They are visible through the panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive The assistant control panel has one LED The table below describes the LED indications LED off LED lit and steady LED LED blinking On the front of No power Green Power supply on EI Drive in an alarm the drive the board OK state If a control panel Drive in a fault Drive in a fault state S atlacned tothe state To reset To reset the fault the fault press switch off the drive RESET from the power control panel or switch off the drive power drive switch to At the top left Panel has no Green Drivein anormal Green Drive in an alarm corner of the power or no state state remote control assistant control drive ANT panel connection Drive in a fault state To reset the fault press RESET from the control panel or switch off the
371. well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3013 3015 W Earth fault protection The Earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection can be selected to be active during start and run or during start only An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection Settings Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT B Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected Program features 147 Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT B Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the input power cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple If a phase is lost the ripple increases Settings Parameter 3016 SUPPLY PHASE Pre programmed faults B Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current B DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives E DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL E Drive temperature The drive supervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit B Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication is given B Internal fault If th
372. when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SPV3OVRORD State change according to supervision parameters LY 3207 3209 or when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SPV1UNDORD See selection SPV1OVRORHDLY 45 LY SPV2UNDORD See selection SPV20VRORDLY 46 LY SPV3UNDORD See selection SPV3OVRORDLY 47 LY CNTR OVER _ State change when counter value exceeds the limit defined 48 by par 1905 COUNTER LIMIT See parameters 1904 1911 CNTR UNDER State change when counter value is below the limit defined 49 by par 1905 COUNTER LIMIT See parameters 1904 1911 al Az AB A Q gt amp O 0 LOGIC VAL State change according to logic operation defined by parameters 8406 8410 ENTER State change when drive output frequency speed enters the 51 SETPNT reference area ie the difference is less than or equal to 4 of the maximum reference 292 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description AT SETPOINT State change when drive output frequency speed equals the 52 reference value is within tolerance limits ie the error is less than or equal to 1 of the maximum reference Al L1 amp DIS State change when Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW 53 EBEN C O Al2 L2 amp DI5 State change when AI2 value par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW 54 value and when DI5 is active Al
373. when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 1496 of the nominal DC voltage LIMIT ALARM Drive output current is limited and alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS 2026 is generated when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of the nominal DC voltage There is a 10 s delay between the activation of the alarm and the output current limitation The current is limited until the ripple drops under the minimum limit 0 3 hg ALARM The drive generates alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS 2026 when the DC ripple exceeds 1496 of the nominal DC voltage k l B Actual signals and parameters 245 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth ground fault is ENABLE detected in the motor or the motor cable Note Disabling earth ground fault may void the warranty DISABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 0016 when the earth fault is detected during run The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 0016 when the 2 earth fault is detected before run 3018 COMM FAULT Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication NOT SEL break The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT Protection is active The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR 1 0028 and coasts to stop CONST SP 7 Protection is active The drive generates alarm O COMM 2005 and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING
374. without a pulse encoder is needed or permanent magnet motor is used and the back emf voltage is unknown Note If motor parameters group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID run it must be repeated BW 1D run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here For basic control panel see page 75 and for assistant control panel see page 87 in chapter Control panels The ID run cannot be performed without a control panel WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the AN nominal speed during the ID run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID run O De couple the motor from the driven equipment O If parameter values group 07 OPERATING DATA to group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAX CURRENT gt lon 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run enable signal is on parameter 7607 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown at the top Press key amp to switch between local and remote control ET X ET El EJ 0 Start up control with I O and ID run Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save Loc the new setting by pre
375. xternal commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors ie power ups by applying power is two per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000 Note If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3 wire a pulse start stop When the control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel first press the LOC REM key and then the stop key CQ Introduction to the manual 21 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes applicability target audience and purpose of this manual It describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more information The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery installing and commissioning the drive The flowchart refers to chapters sections in this manual Applicability The manual is applicable to the ACS355 drive firmware version 5 02b or later See parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 250 Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols The manual is written for readers worldwide Both SI and imperial units are
376. xternal reference 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED FUN1 amp 2 timed functions 1 and 2 select an external speed reference or constant speed 1 timed function active 0 timed function inactive Timed Timed Operation function 1 function 2 0 0 External reference External reference 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST EN idi 1 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST BNEBNN A 1 1 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST BEEN didi All parameters No Name Value CS1 2 3 4 1301 MINIMUM Al 100 0 100 0 Actual signals and parameters 197 Description Def FbEq When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED 2 FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 this timed function selects a constant speed 1 timed function active 0 timed function inactive Speed defined by parameter 1202 S JGONSTSPEED een 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 PS When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED FUN1 amp 2 timed functions 1 and 2 select a constant speed 1 timed function active O timed function inactive Timed Timed Operation Speed defined by parameter 1202 Iconsrspecp e Speed defined by parameter 1203 Canseco o 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 Iconsrspecp o i 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 096 mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the
377. y pressing repeatedly Ez until DARA you get to the Main menu CHANGED PAR X EXIT 100 00 ENTER Go to the Changed parameters mode by selecting LOC UCHANGED PAR CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys Ca and SY 7 0 ON PEED and pressing WS Select the changed parameter on the list with keys AS 0C PAR EDIT and amp v 7 The value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press E wl to modify the value 1202 0 0 P i 1 CANCEL 100 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys CA LOC OPAR EDIT and SY 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the 5 0 H 7 value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE To accept the new value press Ew If the new value 0C CHANGED PAR is the default value the parameter Is removed from the ON P list of changed parameters J cancel the new value and keep the original press Control panels 101 E Fault logger mode In the Fault logger mode you can view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory e see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote con
378. ys STO activation delay is below 1 ms STO indication delay time from the de energization of any STO input to the updating of the status bit is 200 ms Note If any STO channel is toggled very fast it is possible that the drive trips to overcurrent or short circuit Installation Connect the cables as shown in the diagram below STO input channels can be also supplied with an external power supply The required supply current is maximum 15 mA for each STO channel and the voltage requirement is 24 V DC 10 The negative terminal of the power supply must be connected to the analog ground AGND of the drive Safe PLC AGNDo X1C 1 OUT19 X1C 2 OUT2o STO can also be daisy chained from drive to drive so that several drives are behind one safety switch If STO outputs OUT1 and OUT2 are used to supply the STO circuit maximum five drives can be supplied The number of drives depends on the Appendix Safe torque off STO 403 24 V auxiliary voltage load I O panel load used fieldbus or STO circuits max 200 mA of the drive supplying the STO circuit see section Control connection data on page 369 When using external supply all analog grounds AGND of the drives must be chained together Note Daisy chaining lowers the total system safety integrity level which needs to be calculated case by case for each system Start up and commissioning Always test the operation and reaction o
379. z with 50 duty cycle 0 16 kHz between two ACS355 drives NO NC 250 VAC 30 V DC 0 5A 30V DC 5A 230 VAC 2Arms Transistor output PNP 30 V DC 100 mA 30 V DC short circuit protected 10 Hz 16 kHz 1 Hz 0 2 X1A 20 21 can be used either as a digital or as a frequency output See Appendix Safe torque off STO on page 399 370 Technical data Brake resistor connection Short circuit protection The brake resistor output is conditionally short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 IEC EN 61800 5 1 and UL 508C For correct fuse selection contact IEC 60439 1 UL 508C your local ABB representative Rated conditional short circuit current as defined in IEC 60439 1 and the Short circuit test current by UL 508C is 100 kA Common DC connection Maximum power through common DC connection is equal to the drive nominal power See ACS355 Common DC application guide 3AUA0000070130 English Efficiency Approximately 95 to 98 at nominal power level depending on the drive size and options Degrees of protection IP20 cabinet installation UL open Standard enclosure The drive must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding from contact IP20 NEMA 1 Achieved with an option kit MUL1 R1 MUL1 R3 or MUL1 R4 including a hood and a connection box Technical data 371 Ambient conditions Environmental limits for the drive are given below The drive is to be used in a heated indoo
380. zation TTC dades idad ro e 139 salgo 2 occurs neck la ee Meee e aaa de Gee LA 139 Acceleration and deceleration ramps 000 eee 139 BITS 20 ctentasinibetddesieudetouri dative debo e a daa 139 Critical SUBBUS vue ooh eG eii arnor os ee bad eb depen Rea d Red e qtd s 140 saljs c re ee 140 Gonstant Speeds 1 12 Coq Et bacv Beo e Rao Rea d dadas 140 sapis APT PETIT TTE 140 Custom U f ratio P IP ETTTT 141 SINS MEE via idad dd a R a ced 141 DiAgNOStCS P eee he oe eee Eee TAGES n eee a ees 141 Speed controller tuning 00 00 cee tees 142 Iul 245 26t whee ena wenee bees ia a 142 Bcc vete tocata LTEM 143 Speed control performance figures ooooccooccccoo eee 143 Torque control performance figures oooooccocenonrr es 143 Scalar control y er ii ii 144 CIOS corto e to ee ae ee See ee eee ee 144 IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive 0c eee 144 vui Re Mc 144 Programmable protection functions x2 4e su esc ER EEG Reed Ex ERE DPI Y RE REESE 144 Di MEER rrr 144 Panel loss Mec a o e a td a 145 External taut PCT 145 e a A E A 145 Motor thermal protection ies cs e e ee es 145 Underload protectio seso ato eres dean 146 Earth fault protection uo tert ie IE UR D XL Lao ue o cee nd 146 Incorrect Wiring a ce scere de acd tec at RO dr cond NON eae de ide eee MR ace we cete to o dE 146 In par phase loss 2222tc2ica sitia iaaa hi eae De Rd ibat baud Eta det ded 147 Pre programmed faults 24 dee RECO S

ABB - ACS 355

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents